2008 Cadillac CTS Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
This manual describes features that may be available in
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.
For example, more than one entertainment system may
be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
Using this Manual
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Index
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Vehicle Damage Warnings
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. A
box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things
that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the
warning.
You will also find notices in this manual.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
{CAUTION:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
Vehicle Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do Not do this”
or “Do Not let this happen.”
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints
in the outboard seating positions.
The vehicle’s rear seats have head restraints in the
outboard seating positions, but they are not adjustable.
{CAUTION:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance
that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury
in a crash. Do not drive until the head
restraints for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up to
raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button,
located on the top of the
seatback, and push the
restraint down.
Active Head Restraint System
On vehicles with an active head restraint system in the
front outboard seating positions. These automatically
tilt forward to reduce the risk of neck injury if the vehicle
is hit from behind.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The vehicle’s head restraints are not designed to
be removed.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move a manual seat forward or rearward:
1. Lift the bar to unlock
Front Seats
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
horizontal control up or down.
Power Seats
The vertical control is used for reclining your seatback.
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle may have this
feature. The driver’s and
passenger’s seatback
lumbar support can
be adjusted by moving the
control located on the
outboard side of the seat
cushions.
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. Keep in mind that as your seating
position changes, as it may during long trips, so
should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the
seat as needed.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the horizontal control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated and Ventilated Seats
Memory Seat and Mirrors
On vehicles with this feature, the buttons are located on
the climate control panel.
The buttons for this feature are located on the
driver’s door.
1: Saves the seating position for driver 1.
2: Saves the seating position for driver 2.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press for the heated
seat and seatback.
{(Ventilated Seat): Press for the ventilated seat.
S: Recalls the easy exit position.
A light bar in the climate control display shows the
setting; high, medium or low.
To program the buttons:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatback
recliner and both outside mirrors.
Press either button to start that feature at the highest
setting. Each press of the button, decreases the setting.
2. Press and hold button 1 for at least three seconds.
To turn the feature off, press the button until the light
turns off.
Two beeps sound to confirm that the seat and
mirror positions have been saved.
The heated or ventilated seats shut off when the vehicle
is turned off.
3. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
button 2.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With an automatic transmission, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P) to recall the stored driving positions.
3. Press and hold the exit button located above
buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door armrest
for at least three seconds.
With a manual transmission and the engine is running,
the parking brake must be set to recall the memory
seat driving positions. The stored driving positions can
be recalled without setting the parking brake if the
vehicle is off.
Two beeps sound to confirm that the exit position
has been saved.
4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
memory seat button 2 or the transmitter.
Press one of the numbered memory buttons to recall
the stored setting. Each time a memory button is
pressed, a single beep will sound.
To recall the stored exit positions, press and release the
exit button. One beep sounds, and the seat moves to
the stored exit position for that driver. If an exit position
has not been stored for this driver, the seat moves
all the way back. The position of the outside mirrors
does not change for the exit position.
Three chimes sound and the setting is not recalled if
you press button 1 or 2 when the vehicle is not in
PARK (P) on an automatic transmission or the parking
brake is not set on a manual transmission.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the exit positions.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission and the
engine is running, the parking brake must be set to recall
the stored exit positions.
To recall the stored driving positions when unlocking the
vehicle with the transmitter or after the key is placed
page 3-68.
Three chimes sound and the exit setting is not recalled
if the exit button is pressed when the vehicle is not
in PARK (P) on an automatic transmission or the parking
brake is not set on a manual transmission.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat or mirror controls.
Two personalized exit positions can also be
programmed. Use the following steps to program exit
positions:
To recall your stored exit positions when unlocking the
vehicle with the transmitter, or when the ignition is
turned off and the driver’s door is opened, see DIC
1. Press memory seat button 1, or the unlock button
on the transmitter, to recall the driving position.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exit position.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the front passenger’s seat has a manual reclining
seatback, the lever used to operate it is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
{CAUTION:
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
Power Reclining Seatbacks
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
If your seats have power reclining seatbacks, use the
vertical power seat control located on the outboard side
of each seat.
• To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Fold the seatback down. This allows direct access
to the trunk.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
To return the seatback to the upright position:
Your vehicle may have a split folding rear seat.
To lower one or both of the rear seatbacks:
{CAUTION:
1. Pull forward on the tab,
located on the outboard
side of the seatback,
to unlock the seatback.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place.
2. Make sure the seatback is locked into place
by pushing and pulling on it.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the other seatback.
When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in
the upright, locked position.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
restrained properly too.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are
met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety
belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in
a side crash.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash.
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
You can move the height
adjuster up just by
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
pushing up on the shoulder
belt guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
{CAUTION:
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of the elastic cord exposed.
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use a
child restraint.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children should always be secured in
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
appropriate child restraints.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint. Make
sure the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that restraint.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
CAUTION: (Continued)
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for
use with or without the top tether being attached. Others
require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
Top Tether Anchor
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Rear Seat
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
information.
The top tether anchors are located under the covers on
the rear seatback filler panel. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the cover to open
the cover and expose the anchor.
2.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,
raise the head restraint.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has a fixed head
restraint and you are using
a dual tether, route the
tether around the
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
head restraint.
If the position you are
using has a fixed head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether over the head
restraint.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-43 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
tether anchor locations.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-42.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
on this, including important safety information.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
for additional information.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-43 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
tether anchor locations.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
CAUTION: (Continued)
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should light
and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
{CAUTION:
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
Roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle or in a severe
frontal impact. They are not designed to inflate
in rollover or rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or
leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a crash. Always wear
your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or
roof-rail airbags.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
provide information that is used to determine if the
airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full
deployment.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail
side impact and roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in a severe frontal
impact. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
In addition, your vehicle has a dual-stage driver airbag.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle also has a dual-depth passenger airbag
that adjusts the restraint according to crash severity,
seat location, and safety belt status using electronic
frontal sensors and other special sensors which enable
the sensing system to monitor the position of the
front passenger seat. The passenger airbag inflates to a
reduced depth when the passenger seat is in a
forward position. For more rearward front seating
positions, the passenger airbag may inflate to an
increased depth (a full deployment), based on the crash
severity measured early in the event. (Always wear
your safety belt, even with frontal airbags.)
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in rollovers or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of
the vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will
deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or in a
severe frontal impact.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage to a
vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For
frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle
hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down. For seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail
airbags, deployment is determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
and right front passenger’s seat. Seat position sensors
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant seating positions.
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for
some time after they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical
attention.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when you start your vehicle.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol
for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s
airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off. See
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-2.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether
or not there is an airbag for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional
material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions,
seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask
the person to place the seatback in the fully upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When the
passenger sensing system has allowed the airbags to be
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbags are active.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
page 1-69 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
page 7-15.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
operation of the passenger sensing system.
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or
trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as
an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing
pad or device, installed under or on top of the
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Object Detection Systems ...............................2-51
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
CAUTION: (Continued)
the vehicle move. The windows will function
with the keyless access transmitter in the
vehicle and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless access
transmitter in a vehicle with children.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls or even make
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will have either of the following keys.
This key can be used for
To remove the key, press
the button (A) near the
bottom of the keyless
access transmitter, and
pull the key out. Never pull
the key out without
the driver’s door, ignition,
and glove box.
pressing the button.
Your vehicle may have the Keyless Access System.
information on starting the vehicle.
This key, located inside
the keyless access
transmitter, can be used
for the driver’s door, glove
box, and rear seat
pass-through door. See
“Rear Seat Pass-Through
page 2-20 for more
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
information.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter does not
work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle
for the transmitter to work, try this:
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Keyless Access System
Your vehicle may have a Keyless Access System that
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
Industry Canada.
If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless access
transmitter range, try doing one of the following:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Check to make sure that an electronic device such
as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not
causing interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
within five seconds from the previous press of the lock
for additional information.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions,
including lock, unlock, remote trunk release and vehicle
locator/panic alarm will work up to 65 feet (20 m) away.
" (Unlock): Press " to unlock the driver’s door. If " is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
doors will unlock. The interior lamps will come on and
stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps will
flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold V
for about one second to release the trunk lid. The
transmission must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
Lto locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps will
flash and the horn will sound three times.
Press and hold Lfor more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash
and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved
Q(Lock): Press Q to lock all the doors. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking
lamps may flash once to indicate locking has occurred,
to START or Lis pressed again. The ignition must be
in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
or the horn may chirp when Q is pressed again
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be
re-coded to match the new transmitter.
The lost transmitter will no longer work after the new
transmitters are re-coded. The vehicle can have a
maximum of eight transmitters matched to it. See
“Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
Replace the battery if the Replace Battery In Remote
Key message displays in the DIC. See “Replace Battery
In Remote Key” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-54 for additional information.
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch, located above
the metal base.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle comes with
two transmitters.
Keyless Access System Operation
Your vehicle may have a Keyless Access System
that lets you lock and unlock your vehicle’s doors, open
the trunk lid, remotely start the engine, and locate
your vehicle or sound your vehicle’s alarm from a
distance as much as 195 feet (60 m) away.
The Keyless Access System also lets you lock and
unlock the vehicle’s doors and access the trunk without
removing the remote transmitter from your pocket,
purse, briefcase, etc. The system operates when a front
door handle is pulled or the remote trunk release
button is pressed. You must have the keyless access
transmitter with you and within 3 feet (1 m) of the door or
trunk you are opening. See “Keyless Locking” and
page 3-68.
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Similar
Q(Lock): Press Qto lock the doors. The turn signal
indicators will flash. If Qis pressed twice, the doors
will lock, the turn signal indicators will flash twice, and
the horn will sound once.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Keyless Access
You can program your vehicle so the turn signal
indicators will not flash and the horn will not sound
when pressing Qon the keyless access transmitter.
For more information see “Remote Door Lock”
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
" (Unlock): Press " once to unlock the driver’s door.
The turn signal indicators will flash twice.
/(Remote Start): If your vehicle has this feature,
press / after pressing Q to operate the remote start
additional information.
Press " twice within five seconds to unlock all the
doors. If it is dark enough outside, your interior lamps
will come on.
G (Trunk): Press and hold G for about
one second to open the trunk while the engine is
turned off or the shift lever is in PARK (P).
You can program your vehicle so the turn signal
indicators will not flash and the fog lamps and reverse
lamps remain on steady for about 20 seconds when the
keyless access transmitter is used to unlock the
vehicle. See “Remote Door Unlock” under DIC Vehicle
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release Lto locate your vehicle. The horn will chirp
three times and the turn signal lamps will flash
three times.
If your vehicle has the memory feature you can program
and recall memory settings when you press " on the
keyless access transmitter. See Memory Seat and
Press and hold Lfor three seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn will chirp and the turn signal lamps
will flash for 30 seconds. Press and release L again
to cancel the panic alarm.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each Keyless Access System is coded to allow only
transmitters programmed to your vehicle to work.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased and programmed through your dealer/retailer.
Your dealer/retailer can reprogram your vehicle so
lost or stolen transmitters no longer work with your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when you
have a recognized transmitter, do the following.
Two recognized transmitters are required for Canadian
owners.
6. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter into the
transmitter pocket with the transmitter buttons
facing the front of the vehicle. The transmitter
pocket is inside the center console storage
area located between the driver and front
passenger seats.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Have the recognized transmitter and the new,
unrecognized transmitter(s) with you.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder
located on the outside of the driver’s door.
7. Once the transmitter is programmed, a beep will
sound. The DIC will display Ready To Learn
Electronic Key #X, where X can be 3 or 4, or
Maximum # Electronic Keys Learned.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times within
five seconds.
5. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
Ready To Learn Electronic Key #X, where X can
be 2, 3 or 4.
8. Press the ignition control knob to exit
programming mode.
9. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket
and press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter two times.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Canadian immobilizer standard requires Canadian
owners to see their dealer/retailer for matching new
transmitters when two recognized transmitters are not
available. United States owners are permitted to match a
new transmitter to their vehicle when a recognized
transmitter is not available.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder
located on the driver’s door.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times
within five seconds.
5. The DIC will display Press Start Control To
Learn Keys.
The procedure will require three, ten minute cycles to
complete the matching process.
6. Press the ignition switch in.
7. The DIC will read Learn Delay Active Wait XX Min
and will count down to zero, one minute at a time.
1. The vehicle must be off.
8. The DIC will display Press Start Control To Learn
Keys again.
9. Press the ignition switch in again.
10. The DIC will again read Learn Delay Active Wait
XX Min and will count down to zero, one minute
at a time.
The DIC will display Press Start Control To Learn
Keys again.
11. Press the ignition switch in again.
12. The DIC will again read Learn Delay Active Wait
XX Min and will count down to zero, one minute
at a time.
2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter into the
transmitter pocket with the transmitter buttons facing
the front of the vehicle. The transmitter pocket is
inside the center console storage area located
between the driver and front passenger seats.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. A beep will sound and the DIC will read Ready To
Learn Electronic Key # X. At this time, all previously
known transmitters have been erased.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the Replace Battery In Remote
Key message displays in the DIC. See “REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warnings and
15. Once the transmitter is recognized and
programmed, a beep will sound and the DIC will
display Ready To Learn Electronic Key # X.
A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display
Electronic Key Not Detected when you try to start the
vehicle. If this happens, place the transmitter in the
center console storage area transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing to the front of the vehicle. Then, with
the vehicle in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), press
the brake pedal and the ignition control knob.
information about your vehicle’s electronic keyless
ignition with push start. Although this will start the
vehicle, it is recommended that you replace the
transmitter battery as soon as possible.
16. To program additional transmitters, insert each
transmitter in the pocket until you hear a beep
and the DIC advances to the next electronic key
number.
17. When complete, press the ignition control knob.
18. Press the unlock button on each transmitter
programmed to complete programming.
Up to four transmitters can be programmed to the
vehicle. The DIC will display Maximum # Electronic
Keys Learned and will exit the programming mode.
After performing this process, transmitters previously
programmed will no longer work with your vehicle
and must be reprogrammed.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
Remote Vehicle Start
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to start the
engine from outside of the vehicle. It may also start
the vehicle’s automatic climate control system. When the
remote start system is active, the climate control
system will heat and cool the inside of the vehicle
according to the previous settings of the system before
turning the vehicle off. The windshield defroster or
rear window defogger will be turned on by the climate
control system when it is cold outside. If the vehicle has
heated seats, they will also turn on. See Heated and
Normal operation of the climate control system will
return after the ignition is turned to ON/RUN. See Dual
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the slot on the side or
back of the transmitter.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
Your transmitter, with the remote start button, provides
an increased range of operation. However, the range
may be less while the vehicle is running. As a result, you
may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off,
than you were to turn it on.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, press
the brake pedal and turn the ignition to ON/RUN to drive
the vehicle.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.
/(Remote Start): Press and release the lock button
and then press and hold this button to use the
remote start feature.
To manually shut off a remote start:
• Aim the transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button until the turn signal lights
flash or if the vehicle’s lights are not visible, press
and hold the remote start button for at least
four seconds. The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing
the remote start button again after the vehicle
has started will turn off the ignition.
The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it
provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running that
may be extended 10 more minutes. If you press and
release the transmitter lock button and then press and
hold the remote start button on the transmitter again
before the first 10 minutes of engine running time
has expired, 10 minutes are added to the remaining
minutes. For example, if the lock button and then
the remote start buttons are pressed again after
five minutes of the engine run time, 10 minutes are
added and you now have 15 minutes of engine running.
The added ten minutes are considered a second
remote vehicle start.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is still running, to extend the engine running time
by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended
one time.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once two remote starts or a single start with a time
extension have been used, the vehicle must be started
with the keyless access ignition control knob before
you can use the remote start feature again.
Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with the
remote vehicle start system enabled. The system may
be disabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “Remote Start” under DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-68 for additional information.
The remote start feature will not operate if any of the
following occur:
information when using remote start in a closed
garage.
• The ignition is in any position other than LOCK/OFF.
• A keyless access transmitter is inside the vehicle.
• The hood is open.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature. This
feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature. See your
dealer/retailer if you would like to add the manufacturer’s
remote vehicle start feature to your vehicle.
• There is an emission control system malfunction.
• The remote start feature is not enabled. See
page 3-68.
The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if
the coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil pressure
is too low.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the inside, use the manual lock levers located
on the door panels near the windows.
Door Locks
Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the door.
To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.
If the windows are down and the doors are locked, do
not reach in to manually unlock the vehicle because you
will set off the alarm.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
From the outside, use the key, or press the lock or
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
On vehicles with the Remote Keyless Access system,
the door unlocks by pulling the door handle when
you have the transmitter with you. See Keyless Access
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
Central Door Unlocking System
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking feature. When
unlocking the driver’s door, you can unlock the other
doors by holding the key in the turned position for
a few seconds or by quickly turning the key twice in the
lock cylinder.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
door lock switch or the lock button on the RKE
page 3-68 for more information.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
front doors.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
vehicle is programmed so that the doors will lock
automatically when all doors are closed, the ignition is
on, and the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).
The doors will automatically unlock when you stop the
vehicle and move the shift lever back into PARK (P).
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and
press to lock the doors.
Delayed Locking
With this feature, you can delay the actual locking of
the doors.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, the vehicle is
programmed so that the doors will lock automatically
after the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km). The doors
will automatically unlock when the ignition is turned
off and the key is removed from the ignition.
When the power door lock switch is pressed when the
key is not in the ignition and the driver’s door is opened,
a chime will sound three times indicating that delayed
locking is active.
When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock
automatically after five seconds. If a door is reopened
before five seconds have elapsed, the five second timer
will reset itself once all the doors are closed again.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are
locked, have that person use the manual lever or
power door lock switch. When the door is closed again,
it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lever or
the power door lock switch to lock the door.
You can press the door lock switch again or the lock
button on the RKE transmitter to override this feature
and lock the doors immediately.
The power door locks can be programmed through
prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). These prompts allow you to choose
various lock and unlock settings. For more information
page 3-68.
You can turn this feature off using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). When delayed locking is off, the doors
will lock immediately when you press the power
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the locks, do the following:
Rear Door Security Locks
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
2. Close the door.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. The rear doors
must be open to access
them. The label showing
lock and unlock positions is
located near the lock.
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) or Keyless Access System transmitter, if
the vehicle has one, the power door lock switch, or
the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lock Label shown
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
Trunk
If the power door lock switch is pressed when the key is
in the ignition and a door is open, all the doors will
lock and only the driver’s door will unlock. If you close
the doors, they can be locked by using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Be sure to remove the
key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
This feature can be overridden by pressing the lock
button on the RKE transmitter or by pressing the power
lock switch a second time.
On vehicles with a Keyless Access System, the system
can be programmed to alert you when all the doors
are closed and a transmitter has been left inside of the
for more information.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
is being pressed and the vehicle recognizes the
transmitter. The vehicle must be in PARK (P) and the
valet mode turned off.
Trunk Lock Release
The remote trunk release
button is located on the
lower portion of the
driver’s door.
If your vehicle is ever without power, the trunk area can
still be manually accessed by using one of the
following procedures.
On vehicles with a rear seat pass-through door:
1. Fold the rear armrest down and open the
pass-through door. See “Rear-Seat Pass Through”
following for more information.
2. Reach upward through the opening to locate the
emergency trunk release handle. See “Emergency
Trunk Release Handle” for more information.
To use the remote trunk release, the shift lever must be
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for a vehicle with an
automatic transmission. The shift lever must be
in NEUTRAL, with the parking brake set for a vehicle
with a manual transmission.
3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to open
the trunk lid.
On vehicles with a split folding rear seat:
Press the button to open the trunk. You can also press
the button with the trunk symbol on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to open the trunk.
2. Reach upward through the opening to locate the
trunk release handle.
On vehicles with a Keyless Access System, squeeze
the trunk release button located on the rear of the trunk
lid above the license plate, as long as you have your
transmitter with you. Entry occurs when the button
3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to open
the trunk lid.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Close the trunk by pulling on the handle. Do not use the
handle as a tie-down.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
Rear-Seat Pass Through
If your vehicle has the rear seat-pass through door, you
can access the trunk without opening the trunk lid.
This is especially useful when transporting long items.
To open the door, pull down the rear seat armrest. Then
pull the lever all the way down to release the door.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the back wall of the trunk. This handle
will glow following exposure to light. Pull the release
handle toward the front of the vehicle to open the trunk
from the inside.
To close the door, push it up and back into place. Then
try to open the door without pulling up on the lever to
make sure it is locked into place.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power window
switches are located on
the driver’s door.
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with
children.
In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.
The front power window switch operates with two
positions for both up and down movement and the rear
power window switch operates with one position for
up and two positions for down movement. Press
the switch to the first position to lower the window to the
desired level. Pull the switch up to raise the window.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that
allows you to use the power windows once the
ignition has been turned off. For more information, see
When there are children in the rear seat use
the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program each front window, follow these steps:
Express-Down Window
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
This feature is on all windows. Press the switch to the
second position and release the switch to activate
the express-down feature. To stop the window as it is
lowering, pull up briefly on the switch again.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
Express-Up Window
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
fully closed.
This feature is on the front windows. Pull the switch up
to the second position and release the switch to
activate the express-up feature. To stop the window as
it is raising, pull up or press down briefly on the
switch again.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely
closed.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other windows.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, you will need
to replace or recharge your vehicle’s battery.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window
will return to normal operation once the obstruction or
condition is removed.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout
button is located on the driver’s door near the window
switches.
{CAUTION:
Press the right side of the button to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows
still can be raised or lowered using the driver’s window
switches when the lockout feature is active.
If express override is activated, the window
will not reverse automatically. You or others
could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button
again. The light on the button will go out.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.
Sun Visors
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can
also be detached from the center mount and moved
to the side to block glare from that direction.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
The driver’s visor may also have buttons for a built-in
garage door opener. See Universal Home Remote
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to access the
mirror. A light comes on when the cover is lifted and
goes out when it is closed.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a locked door or trunk is opened without using the key
in the driver’s door key cylinder or the transmitter, a
ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn will chirp and
the lights will flash. If the ignition is turned to START
or the door is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button
on the transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm,
the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash
and the horn will sound for about 30 seconds, then will
turn off to save the battery power.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Theft-Deterrent System
If your vehicle has this
feature, the security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door
lock. It activates only if the power door lock switch
is used while the door is open or with the transmitter.
You should also remember that you can start your
vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been
set off.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
To activate the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
• Lock the vehicle with the door key after the doors
are closed.
• Always unlock a door with the transmitter. Unlocking
a door any other way will set off the alarm.
2. Lock the door with the transmitter. The security light
should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the alarm by
pressing the unlock button on the transmitter. The alarm
will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing the Alarm
Immobilizer
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
transmitter.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch will
not work.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses
Breakers.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Immobilizer Operation (Key Access)
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
Your vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The theft-deterrent system is disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The security light will come on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
To program a new key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has 1 stamped on it.
The key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer
control unit in your vehicle and automatically disarms
the system. Only the correct key will start the vehicle. If
the key is ever damaged, you may not be able to
start your vehicle.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition and
start the engine. If the engine will not start see
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be
a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn
the ignition off and try again.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
ON/RUN within five seconds of the ignition being
turned to LOCK/OFF in Step 3.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that
the security light went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have a new key made.
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are
to be programmed.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Service®.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder to
learn the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys can be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition control knob does not rotate, and the
keyless access transmitter appears to be undamaged,
try another keyless access transmitter. Or, you may
try placing the transmitter in the transmitter pocket
located in the center console. See “Electronic Key Not
page 3-54. At this time, you may also want to check the
If the ignition control knob still does not rotate with
the other transmitter, your vehicle needs service. If the
ignition control knob does rotate, the first transmitter
may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service
the theft-deterrent system and have a new keyless
access transmitter programmed to the vehicle.
Immobilizer Operation
(Keyless Access)
Your vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the ignition
control knob is turned to LOCK/OFF.
The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition
control knob is pushed in and a valid transmitter is
found in the vehicle.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or
replacement keyless access transmitters. Up to
4 keyless access transmitters can be programmed for
the vehicle. To program additional transmitters, see
“Matching transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Keyless
The system has one or more keyless access
transmitters that are matched to an immobilizer control
unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly matched keyless
access transmitter will start the vehicle. If the keyless
access transmitter is ever damaged, you may not
be able to start your vehicle.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be
a problem with your immobilizer system. Turn the
ignition control knob off and try again.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
of your vehicle and more information.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines for the first
500 miles (805 km):
Ignition Positions (Key Access)
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
or slow.
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain
from using the full throttle while driving.
Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
If these procedures are not followed, the engine,
axle, or other parts could be damaged.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this break-in guideline every
time you get new linings.
The key can be turned to four different positions.
To shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from its
cylinder could cause damage or break the key. Use
the correct key and turn the key only with your
hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If it is and
you have a manual transmission vehicle, turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the key
hard. If none of this works, then your vehicle
needs service.
To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the ignition
key has to be in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
The battery could be drained if the key is left in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. The vehicle might not start if the battery is allowed
to drain for an extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which the
key can be inserted or removed. This position locks the
ignition and shifter on automatic transmission vehicles,
and the ignition and steering wheel on manual
transmission vehicles.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. A chime sounds
when the driver’s door is opened while the vehicle
is parked and the key is left in the ignition. Always
remember to remove the key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock the ignition and transmission.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when
the engine is off. This position allows you to turn off
the engine.
The battery could be drained if the key is left in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. The vehicle might
not start after it has been parked for an extended
period of time.
C (ON/RUN): This position is for driving. It is the
position the ignition switch returns to after the engine
starts, and the key is released.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A (LOCK/OFF): The ignition control knob cannot be
removed from the vehicle. The keyless access
transmitter must be inside the vehicle to start the
engine. This position locks the ignition and shifter on
automatic transmission vehicles, and the ignition
and steering wheel on manual transmission vehicles.
Ignition Positions (Keyless Access)
You can turn the ignition control knob to four different
positions.
To shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when
the engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off
the engine.
C (ON/RUN): This position is for driving. It is the
position the ignition switch returns to after the engine
starts, and the control knob is released.
If you need to shift the transmission out of PARK (P),
the ignition control knob has to be in ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
Using a tool to force the knob from its cylinder could
cause damage or break the knob.
Make sure the keyless access transmitter is inside the
vehicle when trying to turn the ignition control knob.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, put your
foot on the brake pedal and turn the ignition control
knob to the START position. When the engine begins
cranking, let go of the ignition control knob, it will return
to the ON/RUN position.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof
If the transmitter is not in the vehicle or something is
interfering with the transmitter, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display Electronic Key Not Detected.
more information.
Power to the audio system will work up to 10 minutes or
until the driver’s door is opened. Power to the windows
or sunroof will work up to 10 minutes or until any
door is opened. For an additional 10 minutes of
operation, close all the doors and turn the key to
ON/RUN and then back to LOCK/OFF.
If the battery in the keyless access transmitter needs
replacing, the DIC displays Replace Battery In Remote
Key. The vehicle can still be driven. See “Battery
Replacement” under Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-9 for more information.
Starting the Engine
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). The
engine will not start in any other position -- this is a
safety feature. To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
The shift lever should be in neutral position and the
parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to
the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle will not
start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down. That is
a safety feature.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. If your vehicle has the
keyless access system, make sure there is a
keyless access transmitter in the vehicle. When the
engine starts, let go of the ignition. The idle
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If
the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine. Do not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the engine and
speed will go down as your engine gets warm. Do
not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow
the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the ignition key
is turned to the START position, and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in START for many
seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running. Engine cranking
can be stopped by turning the ignition switch
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
transmission gently until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located in the engine compartment on the
passenger side of the vehicle in front of the
fuse block.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
Remove the plastic cap to access the plug.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
The shift lever is located on the center console between
the front seats.
CAUTION: (Continued)
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)
page 4-29.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply your regular brakes first and then press the
shift lever button before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and push
the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button
and move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use REVERSE (R)
to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice, or sand without damaging your transmission.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. You can also
use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage your vehicle. Always
upshift when necessary while using DSC.
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift
Control (DSC) feature that allows you to change
gears similar to a manual transmission. To use
the DSC feature:
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear and
have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of
Control on page 4-13
1. Slide the shift lever over from DRIVE (D) to the
right to MANUAL MODE (M).
If you do not move the shift lever forward or
rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode. When
you are in the sport mode the vehicle will still
shift automatically. While driving in sport mode, the
transmission may remain in a gear longer than it
would in the normal driving mode based on braking,
throttle input, and vehicle lateral acceleration.
MANUAL MODE (M): This position lets drivers select
the range of gears appropriate for current driving
conditions. If your vehicle has this feature, see Driver
Shift Control (DSC) later in this section.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
The SPORT MODE will be displayed in the DIC
2. To enter the DSC mode, press the shift lever
forward to upshift or rearward to downshift.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will
not automatically shift to the next lower gear if the
engine RPM is too high.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently
selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating that
the transmission has not shifted gears.
While in the DSC mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift when the vehicle comes to a
stop and while quickly applying the accelerator to
increase speed. This will allow for more power during
take-off.
The tachometer display on the instrument panel cluster
will show which gear the vehicle is in and a number
indicating the requested gear range when moving
the shift lever forward or rearward. See Speedometer
odometer.
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear ratio allows you to gain more traction
on slippery surfaces.
While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will have
firmer shifting and increased performance. You can use
this for sport driving or when climbing or descending
hills, to stay in gear longer, or to down shift for
more power or engine braking.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
Manual Transmission Operation
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, the shift lever
is located on the center console between the front
seats. The following explains how to operate the manual
transmission.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and
SIXTH (6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5)
and SIXTH (6) the same way you do for SECOND (2).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL when it is
centered in the shift pattern, not in any gear.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal, completely stop the vehicle, and shift into
REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while
pressing the accelerator pedal.
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
Shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less than
25 mph (40 km/h). If you come to a complete stop and it
is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Up-Shift Light
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)
Vehicles with a manual
transmission may have an
up-shift light on the
instrument panel. This light
will show you when to
shift to the next higher gear
for the best fuel economy.
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Do not shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions allow.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when the light comes on.
Notice: If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, or if you race the engine when you
release the clutch pedal while downshifting, you
could damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or the
transmission. Do not skip gears or race the
engine when downshifting.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the light when you downshift.
If the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), or if
the engine is not running smoothly, you should
downshift to the next lower gear. You may have to
downshift two or more gears to keep the engine running
smoothly or for good performance.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located on the lower
portion of the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal down with your left foot.
To release the parking brake, pull the release lever
located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument
panel.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it
does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced. See
information.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on, and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
4. For vehicles with key access, remove the key and
take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with
the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in
PARK (P). Vehicles with the keyless access system,
take the keyless access transmitter with you.
(Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
Use this procedure to shift into PARK (P):
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
information.
If you have to leave your automatic transmission vehicle
with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in
PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved the shift lever
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from
PARK (P) without first pushing the button.
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked into PARK (P).
• Prevent ignition key, Key Access, removal unless
the shift lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever
button fully released, and
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) properly,
the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the
parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it
difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is
called torque lock. To prevent torque lock, set the
parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly
before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see
“Shifting Into Park (P)” previously in the section.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in
the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
information.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before releasing the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission)
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
Before you get out of your vehicle, place the shift lever
in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking brake.
For the base ignition, turn the ignition key to OFF/LOCK,
press the release button and remove the key. See
“Key Release Button” under Ignition Positions (Key
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
For the keyless access ignition, turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF and remove the keyless access transmitter.
page 4-29.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
Engine Exhaust
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
{CAUTION:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your
vehicle when the engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when it is on fairly level
ground, always set the parking brake and
move the automatic transmission shift lever to
PARK (P), or the manual transmission shift
lever to NEUTRAL.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Mirrors
The control on the driver
side door operates both
outside rearview mirrors.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with OnStar® controls. For more
page 2-53.
O (On/Off): The on/off button on the lower left side of
the mirror, is used for the automatic dimming functions
of the rearview mirror.
Press the left or right mirror symbol on the selector
switch to choose the driver side or passenger side mirror.
Mirror Operation
Once a mirror is selected, use the arrows on the control
pad to move the mirror to the correct direction. Adjust
each mirror so you can see the side of your vehicle and
the area behind your vehicle.
The automatic dimming feature comes on each time the
vehicle is started. Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of lights from behind the vehicle.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
and release the AUTO/( (off) button. The indicator
light will come on when this feature is on.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure to
return both mirrors to their original unfolded position
before driving.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
If the vehicle has the memory package, the mirrors can
be programmed for personalization and curb view assist.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park Tilt Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
If the vehicle has the memory seat and mirrors, the
mirrors can be tilted to a preselected position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). Use this park
tilt feature to view the curb when parallel parking.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and
after a five-second delay, the mirrors will return to their
original position.
The park tilt can be turned on or off through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. This mirror does not have a dimming
feature.
Outside Heated Mirrors
When the rear window defogger is turned on, it also
warms both outside rearview mirrors to help clear them
of fog or ice. See “Rear Window Defogger” under
information.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Object Detection Systems
CAUTION: (Continued)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death
could occur. Even with URPA, always check
behind your vehicle before backing up. While
backing, be sure to look for objects and check
your vehicle’s mirrors.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it helps you park easier and avoid other
vehicles while in REVERSE (R). It operates at speeds
less than 5 mph (8 km/h). It can determine how
close objects are to the rear bumper, up to 8 feet (2.5 m)
behind your vehicle. The distance sensors are located
on the rear bumper.
The display is located
above the rear window and
can be seen by looking
over your right shoulder.
{CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision. It
cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as you get closer to a detected object:
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R). The rear display will
then briefly illuminate to let you know the system is
working.
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights
English
8 ft
40 in
23 in
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
0.6 m
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph
(8 km/h). If you are above this speed, the red light on
the rear display will flash.
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and beep for
three seconds
1 ft
0.3 m
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below trunk level. Objects
must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from your rear
bumper. This distance may be less during warmer or
humid weather.
The system can be disabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Park Assist” under DIC
information.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur for three seconds when
you are closer than 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
• The driver disables the system.
• The parking brake pedal is depressed.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep your
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle
or an object was hanging out of your trunk during
your last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in
the rear display. Once the attached object is
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
removed, URPA will return to normal operation.
• A tow bar is attached to your vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar
Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar
service at any time by contacting OnStar. A complete
OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar
Subscriber glove box literature. For more information,
visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to speak
with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentary
minutes
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this
plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions
& Connections Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar.
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or
calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call
Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the accident that your
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your
vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based services.
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only available in the
continental U.S.).
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
is active.
Universal Home Remote
System
Universal Home Remote System
Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
this means that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming
the Universal Home Remote.
Universal Home Remote
System Operation (With
One Triangular LED)
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section.
When programming a garage door, park outside of
the garage. Park directly in line with and facing
the garage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate you are programming.
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
This system provides a way to replace up to
three remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not hold down the buttons for longer than
30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons.
Programming the Universal Home
Remote System
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515
or go to www.homelink.com.
2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from
the Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping
the indicator light in view. The hand-held
transmitter was supplied by the manufacturer of
your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit).
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the
device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
3. At the same time, press and hold both the Universal
Home Remote button that you would like to use to
control the garage door and the hand-held
To program up to three devices:
transmitter button. Do not release the Universal
Home Remote button or the hand-held transmitter
button until Step 4 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after
Universal Home Remote successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
1. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the
two outside buttons at the same time, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote indicator
light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step will
erase the factory settings or all previously
programmed buttons.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
the programming is complete and your garage door
should move when the Universal Home Remote
button is pressed and released. You do not need to
continue the programming Steps 6 through 8 and
can stop here.
If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with the programming
Steps 6 through 8.
It may be helpful to have another person available
to assist with the remaining steps.
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed,
locate inside the garage the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. The name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete Step 8.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press and
hold the Universal Home Remote button, chosen in
Step 3 to control the garage door, for two seconds,
and then release it. If the garage door does not
move, press and hold the same button a
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace
Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
with the following:
second time for two seconds, and then release it.
Again, if the door does not move, press and hold the
same button a third time for two seconds, and
then release.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
the garage door.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming the
Universal Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from the
Universal Home Remote buttons.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515
or go to www.homelink.com.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Erase the programmed buttons when you sell or
terminate your lease.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal
Home Remote device:
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open, press the button. Use the key to lock
and unlock.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle has cupholders located in front of the
center console. Push down on the lid to open.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Instrument Panel Storage
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Your vehicle has a storage area located below the
climate control systems. To access, push on the lid.
To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote
buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier
in this section, beginning with Step 2.
Center Console Storage
Your vehicle has a center console with an upper and
lower storage area. To access the upper storage area,
push the button on the front of the console and lift the
cover. To access the lower storage area, pull up on the
center console. There is an additional storage area
behind the center console. To access, push the cover in.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger side switch
operates the sunroof.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of
the vehicle. Put small loads behind the net. It can
also be positioned into an envelope style to hold smaller
items. The net is not for heavier loads. Store them as
far forward as you can.
Sunroof
If your vehicle has a power sunroof it will only operate
when the ignition is turned on, or in ACC/ACCESSORY,
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
Vent Feature: Press and hold the front of the switch to
vent the sunroof. Press and hold the rear of the
switch to close the vent.
Sunroof Feature: Press the rear of the switch to open
the sunroof, and the front of the switch to close it.
The sunroof switches are located on the overhead
console.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and
stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof will then return to the full-open
or vent position. To close the sunroof once it has
re-opened press and hold the front of the passenger’s
side switch.
The driver side switch
operates the sunshade.
Press and hold the rear of the switch to open the
sunshade. Press and hold the front of the switch to
close the sunshade.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Antilock Brake System Warning Light ...............3-38
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
page 3-13.
on page 3-9.
G. Traction Control System (TCS) Disable Button.
on page 2-41.
J. Audio (Base Audio System) or Audio/Navigation
page 3-106.
page 2-43.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police and
others that you have a problem. The front and rear
turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
A tilt and telescope wheel lets you adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. The steering wheel can be
raised to the highest level to give your legs more room
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is on the
instrument panel.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press again to turn the
flashers completely off.
The hazard warning flashers work even if the key is not
in the ignition switch.
The tilt and telescope lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull the lever
down. Then move the steering wheel up or down
or backward or forward into a comfortable position. Pull
the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power tilt
wheel control is located on
the left side of the
steering column.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
page 3-16.
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up
and the steering wheel tilts up. Push the control
down and the steering wheel goes down.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves
toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control
rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear
of the vehicle.
on page 3-9.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km), a
warning chime will sound and the TURN SIGNAL
ON message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under DIC
information.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
The lever returns automatically when the turn is
complete.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever
to change the headlamps from low to high beam. Pull
the lever back and then release it to change from high to
low beam.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it briefly until the lane
change is complete. The arrow will automatically flash
three times The lever returns to its original position when
it is released.
If the vehicle is turned off while the high beams are on,
they will come on the next time the vehicle is started.
The highbeam light on the
instrument panel cluster,
comes on while the
high-beam headlamps
are on.
Rapid flashing of arrows when signaling for a turn or
lane change can be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.
Other drivers will not see the signal.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse for burned-out bulbs if the
arrow fails to work when signaling a turn. See Fuses and
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
This feature allows you to use the high-beam headlamps
to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you to use this feature. When this is done the following
will occur:
• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long as
the lever is held there. Release the lever to turn
them off.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
• For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps, the low-beam headlamps must be
on to activate the high-beam headlamps. See High
7(Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. For more cycles, hold the lever down
before releasing it.
• If the headlamps are already in high-beam mode,
they will remain on high-beam.
&(Delay): Move the lever to this position to set a
delay between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment band
to set the length of the delay.
6 (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the length
of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer the band is moved towards 7,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must be
in delay for this feature to work.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 (Low Speed): Move the lever to this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
Rainsense™ Wipers
Vehicles with Rainsense™ windshield wipers, have a
moisture sensor for this feature mounted on the interior
side of the windshield behind the rearview mirror.
This sensor automatically operates the wipers by
monitoring the amount of moisture build-up on the
windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear the
windshield depending on driving conditions and the
sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes will
occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes occur more
frequently. If the system is left on for long periods of
time, occasional wipes may occur without any moisture
on the windshield. This is normal and indicates that
the Rainsense™ system is activated.
2 (High Speed): Move the lever to this position for
rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
information.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades. For more information, see
The wiper control should be left in the off position,
unless the wiper is needed.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
The Rainsense™ system is sensitive to vibration and
can activate if something hits the windshield or if
the vehicle hits a bump.
Rainsense™ windshield wipers operate in a delay
mode, as well as a continuous low or high speed as
needed. Move the wiper lever up to the delay position
and turn the band to one of five settings.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The level one or lowest setting is at the bottom of the
band. This setting lets more rain or snow collect on the
windshield between wipes. Turn the delay band
forward to a higher setting to let less rain or snow collect
on the windshield between wipes.
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
The top position is the highest setting. A single wipe
occurs each time the delay band is turned to a higher
setting to indicate that the Rainsense™ ® level has been
increased.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
K (Washer Fluid): Press the button with this
symbol, located at the end of the windshield washer
lever, to wash the windshield. The washer fluid sprays
onto the windshield and the wipers run for a few
cycles to clear the windshield. Press and hold the button
for more wash cycles.
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are
not affected by the Rainsense™ function. The
Rainsense™ system can be overridden at any time by
manually changing the wiper control to low or high
speed. The system will default to normal time delay
operation if the Rainsensor detects something that would
affect Rainsense™ operation.
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when the washer fluid is low.
When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps turn on
automatically. If it is dark, they remain on. See
“Wiper-Activated Headlamps” under Wiper Activated
If the headlamps are on while the windshield is being
washed, the headlamp washers, if the vehicle has them,
will also turn on. See “Headlamp Washer” following
for more information.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on
the exterior glass surface directly in front of
the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause the
moisture sensor to malfunction.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the button again to turn off the heated windshield
washer fluid system. Heated Washer Fluid System
Off displays on the DIC. See DIC Warnings and
four wipe cycles have been completed.
Heated Windshield Washer
If your vehicle has the heated windshield washer fluid
system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap,
or bugs from the windshield.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system is
activated under certain outside temperature conditions,
steam might flow out of the washer nozzles for a
short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed. This
is a normal condition.
The button is located
on the climate control
system panel.
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid displays on the DIC when
the washer fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and
Push the heated washer fluid button to begin four
heated wipe cycles. Heating Washer Fluid Wash Wipes
Pending displays on the DIC. See DIC Warnings and
take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on the
outside temperature. After the first wipe cycle, it can
take up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information.
Headlamp Washer
Your vehicle may have headlamp washers. The
headlamp washers clear debris from the headlamp
lenses.
Cruise Control
The headlamp washers
are located beneath the
headlamps.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Press the washer button located at the end of the
windshield wiper lever, to wash the headlamps. Both the
headlamps and the windshield will be washed. After
the first wash, the headlamps will not be washed until
the fifth press of the windshield washer button.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the windshield will be washed
when the washer button is pressed. If the washer fluid is
low, the headlamp washers will not work.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
turns off.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system and begins
to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See
allow you to safely use it again, the cruise control
can be turned back on.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or
if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
I (On/Off): Press button to activate and turn off the
system. The indicator light on the button turns on
when cruise control is on.
1. Press the cruise control On/Off button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to
make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
SET − (Set/Coast): Press this button to set the speed
or make the vehicle decelerate.
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then the brake is applied. This shuts off the cruise
control. But it does not need to be reset.
To reduce the vehicle’s speed while using cruise
control:
Once the vehicle is driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more, press the +RES button on the steering
wheel. The vehicle will go back to the previous set
speed and stay there.
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each
time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the new desired speed is reached,
then release it.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Headlamps
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. When the brakes are applied the cruise control
turns off. Many drivers find this to be too much
The exterior lamp control is located towards the end of
the turn signal/multifunction lever.
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
O (Off): This position turns off all lamps, except the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
AUTO (Automatic): This position puts the headlamps
in automatic mode. AUTO mode turns the exterior
lamps on and off depending upon how much light is
available outside of the vehicle.
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal (manual and
automatic transmissions).
• Press the clutch pedal to the floor (manual
transmissions).
;(Parking Lamps): This position turns on the
parking lamps together with the following:
• Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
• Press the On/Off button on the steering wheel.
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
Erasing Speed Memory
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
5(Headlamps): This position turns on the
headlamps, together with the previously listed lamps
and lights.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DRL system will make either the reduced intensity
low-beam headlamps or dedicated DRL’s come on
when the following conditions are met:
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for
about six seconds. For this feature to work, the exterior
lamp control must be in AUTO.
• It is still daylight and the ignition is in ON/RUN
or START.
• The exterior lamp control is in off or AUTO and the
headlamps are off.
The wiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off,
when the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF or the
windshield wiper control is turned off.
• The automatic transmission is not in PARK (P).
When DRL’s are on, only the reduced intensity
low-beam headlamps or dedicated DRL’s will be on. No
other exterior lamps will be on. The instrument panel
cluster will not be lit up either.
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
information.
When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it is dark
enough outside, the DRL turns off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it is bright enough outside,
the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the DRL will
turn back on. If the vehicle is started in a dark garage,
the automatic headlamp system comes on immediately.
Once the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about
one minute for the automatic headlamp system
to change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as
usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness lever
is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning the exterior lamp control to off or to the
low-beam headlamp position will turn off the DRL. If the
parking lamps or the fog lamps were turned on
instead, the DRL will still turn off.
Adaptive Forward Lighting System
The Adaptive Forward Lighting System (AFL) swivels
the headlamps horizontally to provide greater road
illumination while turning. AFL will operate when
the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).
AFL will not operate when the transmission is in
REVERSE (R). AFL is not immediately operable after
starting the vehicle; driving a short distance is required
to calibrate the AFL. To enable AFL, set the exterior
lamp switch on the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position. Moving the switch out of the AUTO position will
This will work regardless of gear position and whether
or not the parking brake is set.
Light Sensor
Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
The fog lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
-(Fog Lamps): Turn the fog lamp band on the lever
up to - and release it, to turn the fog lamps on or
The light sensor for the DRL and AUTO headlamp
feature is located on top of the instrument panel. If the
sensor is covered, it will prevent it from sensing
light, and the exterior lamps or the Headlamps
Suggested message will appear on the DIC whenever
the ignition is on.
off. The band will return to its original position.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work.
If the high-beam headlamps are turned on, the fog
lamps will also turn off. They will turn back on again
when you switch back to low-beam headlamps.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
Entry Lighting
The exterior lamps turn off about 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, if the parking lamps
or headlamps have been left on. This protects against
draining the battery. The battery saver does not
work if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition
is turned to LOCK/OFF.
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp
control, when a door is opened or if the transmitter
unlock button is pressed. If activated by the transmitter,
the lighting stays on for about 25 seconds. The entry
lighting system uses the light sensor on the instrument
panel; so it must be dark outside in order for the
lamps to turn on. The lamps turn off about 25 seconds
after the last door is closed. They dim then turn off
if the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. They
To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, turn
the lamps back on with the exterior lamp control.
Instrument Panel Brightness
immediately turn off if the power locks are used.
The knob with this symbol
on it is located on the
Parade Dimming
instrument panel to the left
of the steering column.
This feature does not let the instrument panel backlight
dim during daylight hours while the key is in the
ignition and the headlamps are on. Parade dimming
automatically works with the light sensor, located on top
of the dashboard. If it is dark enough outside and the
parking lamps are on, the backlight on the instrument
panel can be adjusted by turning the instrument
panel brightness knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the lighting. See Instrument Panel
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim them.
Turn the knob completely clockwise to turn on the
interior lamps.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.
These lamps come on automatically when any door is
opened.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
For manual operation, press the button next to each
lamp to turn it on or off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver
Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up
or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert
will be displayed.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into a
power outlet, the battery may drain causing your
vehicle not to start or damage to the battery.
This would not be covered by the warranty. Always
unplug all electrical devices when turning off
your vehicle.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent battery drain
if accessory lamps are left on or something is left
plugged into the accessory power outlet or cigarette
lighter, if the vehicle has one. If accessory lamps such
as the vanity mirror, cargo, reading, console, or
glove box are left on, they automatically time-out after
about 20 minutes. To reset the battery protection,
all of the above lamps must be turned off or the ignition
must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY position.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
There are three accessory power outlets. There is an
outlet located in the front storage area below the climate
control system, one inside the center console storage
bin, and one on the rear of the center console.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
To use an outlet, remove the protective cap. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap. The
accessory power outlet is operational at all times.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Analog Clock
Your vehicle may have two removable ashtrays and
cigarette lighters. One ashtray can be placed into
the instrument panel storage compartment and the other
into the center console rear compartment. To use the
lighter, push it in all the way and let go. When it is ready,
it will pop back out by itself.
The analog clock is located on the instrument panel
above the radio. The clock is not connected with
any other vehicle system and runs by itself. To adjust
the clock:
1. Locate the adjustment buttons directly below the
clock face.
To empty the ashtrays, grip the edges of the bin and
pull it straight out of the housing. To reinstall, push the
tray back into place.
2. Push and hold the right adjustment button to move
the clock hands forward or the left adjustment
button to make the clock hands go backward.
Holding either button down will cause the clock to
advance faster. Release the button before the
desired time is reached.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3. Push and release either button to adjust the time by
one minute increments until the desired time is
reached.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Operation
Climate Controls
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and
the temperature is set, the system automatically controls
the inside temperature, the air delivery mode, the air
conditioning compressor, and the fan speed. When the
indicator light is on, the system is in full automatic
operation. If the air delivery mode or fan setting is
manually adjusted, the auto indicator turns off and
displays will show the selected settings.
Dual Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 60°F (15.5°C) and 90°F (32.2°C).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature setting
will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster. If
the system is set at the warmest temperature setting,
it remains in manual mode at that temperature and it
will not go into automatic mode.
In cold weather, the system starts at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicle until
warmer air is available. The system begins
blowing air at the floor but may change modes
automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain
the chosen temperature setting. The length of
time the system needs to warm up depends on the
outside temperature and the length of time that
has elapsed since the vehicle was last driven.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the climate
control system on or off. When the climate control
system is turned off the air inlet defaults to outside air.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if
necessary.
Manual Operation
HG (Mode): Press the H or G buttons to change the
current airflow mode. The current mode selection
appears in the display screen. Changing the mode
cancels the automatic operation and the system goes
into manual mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation.
You can switch from English to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip underneath
the vehicle while it is idling or after the engine is turned
off is normal.
The outboard air outlets always receive some airflow in
every mode, except defrost. See Outlet Adjustment
on page 3-27 to change this airflow from the outboard
outlets.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
PASS (Passenger Climate Control): Press this button
to set a different temperature for the passenger.
Then press the passenger temperature adjustment
buttons to select a comfortable setting.
\ (Bi-Level): This mode splits the air between the
instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets. In
automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
Pressing the PASS button again automatically sets the
passenger’s temperature to the driver’s setting.
[ (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets and a little air directed to the windshield.
Turning the passenger’s temperature display off does
not shut the climate control system for the passenger off.
The mode buttons can also be used to select the defog
and defrost modes. Information on defogging and
defrosting can be found later in this section.
Q / R (Temperature Adjustment): The temperature
can be adjusted separately for the driver and the
passenger. Press the up or down arrow buttons to
increase or decrease the automatic temperature settings.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC (Fan): Press the D or C buttons to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing either button cancels
automatic operation and the system goes into manual
mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation. The
blower may reduce during an Onstar® session to limit
background noise.
M / F (Recirculation/Outside Air): Press this
button to switch between recirculation and outside air.
Whenever the button is pressed, the indicator light comes
on for the mode being used. The recirculation mode
recirculates air inside the vehicle. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle or
to help cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly. Press
the auto button to have the system select the best air
delivery mode for your temperature setting.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air
filter might need to be replaced. For more information,
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode and
automatically turns off 10 minutes after defog is selected.
This helps to limit window fogging in the vehicle.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to override
the automatic system and turn the air conditioning
system on or off. When in AUTO, the air conditioning
compressor will come on automatically, as necessary.
Using recirculation for long periods of time could cause
the air inside the vehicle to become too dry or stuffy. To
prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle
has cooled, select outside air or press the auto button.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water might drip
underneath the vehicle while idling or after turning off
the engine. This is normal.
The outside air mode pulls fresh air from outside the
vehicle. Outside air is always selected in defrost mode to
prevent fogging.
_ (Heated Windshield Washer, If Equipped): For
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog from
the windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in ON/RUN.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear
as much snow from the rear window as possible.
H G (Mode): Press the mode buttons until defog
The rear window defogger turns off about 15 minutes
after the button is first pressed if the vehicle is moving at
slower speeds. At higher speeds, the rear window
defogger may stay on continuously. With each additional
press, the defogger runs for about 10 minutes. The
defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button
again or by turning off the engine.
appears on the display.
- (Defog): This mode directs the air between the
windshield, floor outlets and side windows. When
this mode is selected, the system turns off recirculation
and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless the
outside temperature is at or below freezing. If
recirculation mode is selected while in defog mode, it
will be cancelled after 10 minutes.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the
rear window defogger button is on. See Outside
0 (Defrost): Pressing defrost directs most of the air to
the windshield, with some air directed to the side
windows. In this mode, the system automatically turns off
recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor,
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material
from the inside of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or anything else that is
sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger
grid and affect your radio’s ability to pick up
stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
This mode may also cause the fan speed and air
temperature to increase.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
By monitoring the solar radiation and the air inside the
vehicle, these sensors help maintain the selected
temperature by adjusting the fan speed, and the air
delivery system. In order to do this, the system can also
supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the
sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated,
as necessary. Do not cover the sensors or the automatic
climate control system will not work properly.
Sensors
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of the instrument panel to direct the airflow. Use the
thumbwheels near the air outlets to open or close off the
airflow.
There is a solar sensor, located on the instrument
panel, near the windshield.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets
at the base of the windshield that could block the
flow of air into the vehicle.
There is also an interior
temperature sensor,
located to the right of the
steering wheel, on the
instrument panel.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the passenger compartment air filter:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the
dust and pollen from the air entering the vehicle.
The filter will need to be changed periodically. See
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them
off again when the wipers are straight up on
the windshield.
This allows access to the leaf screen. The
passenger compartment air filter is located under
the screen.
Using the climate control system without the passenger
air filter installed could let water or other debris enter the
system. This could cause a water leak or noises. Make
sure to install a new air filter after removing the old one.
3. Open the hood to access the engine compartment.
information.
4. Remove the three screws that hold the screen in
place and lift off the screen by lifting and sliding it
toward the center of the vehicle.
5. Pull out on the two tabs located on each end of the
filter cover.
6. Lift the filter cover off by pulling it straight up.
7. Remove the old filter and insert a new one.
The passenger compartment air filter is located
underneath the hood below the windshield wiper arm
and the screen on the passenger side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
for the correct part number for the filter.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the cover.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells
you what to do about it. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly – and even dangerous. So please get to know your
warning lights and gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
more information.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States Automatic Cluster shown, Canada similar
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in either
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). The
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
If your vehicle has to have a new odometer installed,
the new one may read the correct mileage. This is
because your vehicle’s computer has stored the mileage
in memory.
While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is active,
the odometer will change to show the gear range.
more information.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
Trip Odometers
The trip odometer can record the number of miles or
kilometers traveled for up to two trips.
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC), for more information see DIC Operation
For vehicles that have the navigation system, see your
Navigation System manual for more information.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Engine Speed Limiter
This feature prevents the engine from operating at too
many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine’s
rpms are too high, the throttle is closed to reduce
speed. If this is not sufficient, then the fuel supply to the
engine will be limited. When the rpms return to
normal, the fuel supply will return to normal. This helps
prevent damage to the engine.
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for several
seconds and then flash for several more.
Safety Belt Reminders
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. The
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when you start the engine. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there
is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come
more information.
light should go out and the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag and
United States
Canada
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you
use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is or
airbags are off.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more on this, including
important safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
on this, including important safety information.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Up-Shift Light
This light will come on
Your vehicle may have an
up-shift light.
briefly when you turn on
the ignition key, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show
you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also appear.
for more information. This light could indicate that there
are problems with a generator drive belt, or that
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all the accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
When this light comes on, you should shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions allow
you to.
more information.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
brake related DIC messages.
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Warning Light
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
The Traction Control
System/StabiliTrak®
warning light should come
on briefly when the
engine is started.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, your vehicle still has brakes, but
not antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, your vehicle does not have antilock
brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If
it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there may
be a problem with your Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This light will come on
when you first start the
vehicle as a check
to let you know that the
light is working.
It will go out after a few seconds. If the light does not
come on, see your dealer/retailer.
United States
Canada
If the light does not go out or if the light comes on and
stays on while you are driving, your vehicle may
have a problem with the cooling system. You should
stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon
as possible to avoid damage to the engine. A warning
chime will also sound when this light is on.
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
engine coolant overheats the engine coolant
temperature warning light will come on. See Engine
information.
information.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
Solid
Tire Pressure Light
Your vehicle has a tire
pressure light.
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and stays on solid for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with every
page 5-70 for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started
and provides information about tire pressures and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
When the Light is Solid
This indicates that one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
information. Stop and check your tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
The check engine light
comes on to indicate that
there is an OBD II
problem and service is
required.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be
required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
If the Light is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Your vehicle may have this
feature.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
If the vehicle has an oil problem, this light may stay on
after the engine is started, or come on while you are
driving.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
This light indicates that oil is not going through the
engine quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine
could be low on oil or could have some other oil
problem. Have it fixed right away.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The oil light could also come on in the following
situations:
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
• The light will come on briefly when the ignition is
turned on to show that it is working properly. If it
does not come on with the ignition on, there may be
a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed
right away.
• Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, a
chime will sound and the light may blink on and
off. This is normal.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
Your vehicle may have an engine oil pressure gage. It
shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square
inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles
indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but if readings are outside
the normal operating range, the oil pressure light will
information.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A reading outside the normal operating range may be
caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other
problem causing low oil pressure. Check your oil
as soon as possible. See Oil pressure Low Stop Engine
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
page 2-27.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights On Reminder
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
information.
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
Fuel Gage
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
It works only when
the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low message
will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
and a single chime will sound. See DIC Warnings and
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is
also used to display warning/status messages. All
messages appear in the DIC display located at the
bottom of the instrument panel cluster. The DIC buttons
are located on the instrument panel, next to the
steering wheel.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and
do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC displays the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
The top line of the DIC display shows the DIC
information. The bottom line of the DIC display shows
the compass. The compass displays in the trip/fuel
menus and in some vehicle information menus.
If a problem is detected, a warning message appears
on the display. Take any message that appears on
the display seriously and remember that clearing
the message only makes the message disappear, and
does not correct the problem.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) has different
displays which can be
accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons located on
the instrument panel, next
to the steering wheel.
yz Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll up
and down the menu items.
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items
can be displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button:
Odometer
This display shows the distance the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through the
trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu
Items” following for more information on these displays.
Trip A or Trip B
These displays show the current distance traveled since
the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at
the same time. Each trip odometer can be reset to zero
separately by pressing and holding the set/reset
button for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer
is displayed.
T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scroll
through the vehicle information displays. See “Vehicle
Information Display Menu Items” following for more
information on these displays.
U Customization: Press this button to scroll through
each of the customization features. See DIC Vehicle
customization features.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Range
Timer
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive
without refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is based on
the current driving conditions and changes if the
driving conditions change. For example, if you are
driving in traffic and making frequent stops, the display
may read one number, but if you enter the freeway,
the number may change even though you still have the
same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because
different driving conditions produce different fuel
economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better
fuel economy than city driving.
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can
record the time it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press the trip/fuel button
until Timer 00:00:00 displays.
To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button until the
timer starts.
To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button again.
The timer stops and displays the end timing value.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button after the timer has been stopped.
Inst (Instantaneous) Economy
Once the range drops below about 30 miles (48 km)
remaining, the display shows Low Range.
This display shows the current fuel economy in either
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number reflects only the fuel economy
that the vehicle has right now and changes frequently
as driving conditions change. Unlike average economy,
this display cannot be reset.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low
message displays. See “Fuel Level Low” under DIC
information.
AVG (Average) Economy
AVG (Average) Speed
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number
of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this
display was reset. To reset this display to zero, press
the set/reset button.
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle
in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of
this display. To reset this display to zero, press the
set/reset button.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, you must reset the Oil Life yourself after
each oil change. It does not reset itself. Also, be careful
not to reset the Oil Life accidentally at any time other
than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot
be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset
page 5-19. The display shows 100% when the system
is reset.
Speedometer
This display shows a digital speedometer in the DIC.
The speed displays in either miles per hour (mph)
or kilometers per hour (km/h). To change the units from
English to metric, see “Units” later in this section.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Units
Vehicle Information Display Menu Items
This display allows you to select between English or
Metric units of measurement. Once in this display, press
the set/reset button to select between English or
Metric units.
T (Vehicle Information): The following display
menu items can be displayed by pressing the vehicle
information button:
Parking Assist
Oil Life Remaining
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this display allows the system to
be turned on or off. Once in this display, press the
set/reset button to select between On or Off. If
you choose On, the system turns on. If you choose Off,
the system turns off. The URPA system automatically
turns back on after each vehicle start. When the URPA
system is turned off and the vehicle is shifted out of
PARK (P), the DIC displays the Parking Assist Off
message as a reminder that the system has been turned
page 2-51 for more information.
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oil
life remaining. If you see 99% Oil Life Remaining on
the display, that means that 99% of the current oil life
remains.
When the oil life is depleted, the Change Engine Oil
Soon message appears on the display. You should
change the oil as soon as possible. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenance
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure
Calibrate Compass
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure is shown in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle
information button until the DIC displays Front Tire PSI
(kPa) Left ## Right ##. Press the vehicle information
button again until the DIC displays Rear Tire PSI (kPa)
Left ## Right ##
Your vehicle may have this feature. The compass can
be manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass
Change Compass Zone
Your vehicle may have this feature. To change the
page 3-52.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire appears in the
information.
Relearn Remote Key
If your vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, this display allows you to match the transmitter
to your vehicle. If your vehicle has the keyless access
page 2-9 for instructions on matching a keyless access
transmitter to your vehicle. To match an RKE
transmitter to your vehicle:
Battery Voltage
This display shows the current battery voltage. Your
vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based
on the state of the battery. The battery voltage may
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC. This
is normal.
1. Press the vehicle information button until Press V
To Relearn Remote Key displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until Remote Key
Learning Active is displayed.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the charging system light illuminates and/or the DIC
displays a message. See Charging System Light
page 3-20 for more information.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or
province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
A chime sounds indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone where you live, the
compass may give false readings. The compass must
be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is
traveling.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Blank Display
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
This display shows no information.
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
DIC Compass
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. On an automatic transmission vehicle, only
set it when the vehicle is in PARK (P). On a
manual transmission vehicle, only set it when the
vehicle is stopped.
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Press the vehicle information button until Press V
To Change Compass Zone displays.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in
circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or
other industrial structures, if possible.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example,
N for North, or the heading does not change after
making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna
mount, a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad
holder, or any other magnetic item. Turn off the
vehicle, move the magnetic item, then turn on the
vehicle and calibrate the compass.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
5. Calibrate the compass. See “Compass Calibration
Procedure” following.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
DIC Warnings and Messages
Compass Calibration Procedure
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display.
2. Press the vehicle information button until Press V
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
To Calibrate Compass displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display Calibrating Drive In Circles.
Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less than
5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration. The DIC
will display Calibration Complete for a few seconds
when the calibration is complete. The DIC display
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
will then return to Press V To Calibrate Compass.
Accessory Mode Active
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when the accessory mode is active.
more information.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AFL (Adaptive Forward Lighting)
Lamps Need Service
Automatic Light Control Off
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned off.
This message displays when the Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) system is disabled and needs service.
See your dealer/retailer. See Adaptive Forward Lighting
Automatic Light Control On
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned on.
All Wheel Drive Off
Battery Saver Active
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system,
this message displays when there is a temporary
condition making the AWD system unavailable. Your
vehicle will run in 2WD. This could be caused by:
This message displays when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping below expected
levels. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to
save the charge in the battery.
• Loss of wheel or vehicle speed
• AWD system overheat
• Certain vehicle electrical conditions
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
This message turns off when the above conditions are
no longer present and by resetting the warning
message.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the vehicle information button until Battery Voltage is
displayed.
To reset the warning message, turn the ignition off and
then back on again after 30 seconds. If the message
stays on, see your dealer/retailer right away. See
information.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Volts Low
Calibrating Drive In Circles
This message displays when the electrical system is
charging less than 10 volts or the battery has been
drained.
This message displays when calibrating the compass.
Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) to
page 3-52 for more information.
If this message appears immediately after starting the
engine, it is possible that the generator can still recharge
the battery. The battery should recharge while driving,
but may take a few hours to do so. Consider using
an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning
home or to a final destination. Make sure you follow
the manufacturer’s instructions.
Calibration Complete
This message displays when the compass calibration is
information.
Change Engine Oil Soon
If this message appears while driving or after starting
your vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediately
to determine the cause of this problem.
When this message displays, it means that service is
required for your vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly, you
can reduce the load on the electrical system by
turning off the accessories.
When you reset the Change Engine Oil Soon message
by clearing it from the display, you still must reset
the engine oil life system separately. For more
information on resetting the engine oil life system, see
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the vehicle information button until Battery Voltage is
displayed.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check Tire Pressure
Cruise Set To XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when the pressure in one or more
of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. This message
also displays Left Front, Right Front, Left Rear, or Right
Rear to indicate which tire needs to be checked. You can
receive more than one tire pressure message at a time.
To read the other messages that may have been sent at
the same time, press the set/reset button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See
display also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC
is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on. See
This message displays whenever the cruise control is
information.
Driver Door Open
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
Electronic Key Already Known
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays if you try to match a transmitter that
has already been learned. See Keyless Access
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as
airports, automatic toll booths, and some gas
stations have EMI fields which may interfere with
the keyless access transmitter.
Electronic Key Not Detected
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays if the vehicle does not detect
the presence of a transmitter when you have attempted
to start the vehicle or a vehicle door has just closed.
The following conditions may cause this message
to appear:
If moving the transmitter to
different locations within
the vehicle does not
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory
power outlet on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these devices are cell
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving
the keyless access transmitter away from these
devices when starting the vehicle. In addition, PDA
devices and remote garage and gate openers
may also generate Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) that may interfere with the keyless access
transmitter. Do not carry the keyless access
transmitter in the same pocket or bag as these
devices.
help, place the transmitter
in the center console
transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing to the
right and then press the
START button.
• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The battery
voltage must be above 10 volts for the keyless
access transmitter to be detected properly.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic Key Not Detected Restart
Allowed
Engine Oil Low Add Oil
If your vehicle has an oil level sensor, this message
displays if the oil level in the vehicle is low. Check the oil
level and correct it as necessary. You may need to let
the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition
to be sure this message clears.
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when the keyless access transmitter
is not detected inside the vehicle while you are trying
to turn the ignition off. Your vehicle may be near a strong
radio antenna signal causing the keyless access
system to be jammed. The vehicle will remain in
ACC/ACCESSORY until the vehicle is turned off or is
started, or five minutes has expired. If you turn the
ignition off and you cannot find the keyless access
transmitter, you will not be able to restart the vehicle.
The keyless access transmitter needs to be inside of the
vehicle in order for the vehicle to start. See Starting
This message clears itself after 10 seconds, until the
for additional information.
Engine Overheated Idle Engine
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
page 5-30 for more information.
Engine Hot A/C (Air Conditioning) Off
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When
the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
page 5-32 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Power Is Reduced
Heated Washer Fluid System Off
This message displays when the engine power is being
reduced to protect the engine from damage. There
could be several malfunctions that might cause
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when you manually turn off the heated windshield
washer fluid system or when the system automatically
turns off. See “Heated Windshield Washer” under
This message clears itself after 10 seconds.
this message. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to
your destination. The performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be
driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
Hood Open
This message displays when the hood is not closed
completely. Make sure that the hood is closed
completely.
Ice Possible Drive With Care
Fuel Level Low
This message displays when the outside temperature is
cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A chime may
sound when this message displays. See Filling the Tank
on page 5-8.
Learn Delay Active Wait XX Min
(Minutes)
Heated Washer Fluid Wash (Washer)
Wipes Pending
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when matching new transmitters to
the vehicle. See Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-9 for more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when you turn on the heated windshield washer
fluid system. See “Heated Windshield Washer” under
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Left Rear Door Open
Parking Assist Off
This message displays when the driver side rear door is
not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started, this
message displays to remind the driver that the URPA
system has been turned off. Press the set/reset button to
acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
display. To turn the URPA system back on, see “Parking
page 2-51 for more information.
Maximum # Electronic Keys Learned
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when the maximum number of
transmitters have been learned. See Keyless Access
Passenger Door Open
Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
This message displays when the passenger side front
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
Press Brake To Start Engine
(Automatic Transmission Only)
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays if you try to start the engine without
having the brake pressed. The brake needs to be
pressed when starting the engine. See Ignition Positions
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light may also
appear on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil
page 5-16 for more information.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible when this message is displayed.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press Start Control To Learn Keys
Replace Battery In Remote Key
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when matching new transmitters to
the vehicle. See Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-9 for more information.
This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access transmitter
needs to be replaced. To replace the battery, see
“Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry
Rainsense™ Wipers Active
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
while the Rainsense™ wipers are active. See
Right Rear Door Open
This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
Ready To Learn Electronic Key # X
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays while matching new transmitters to
the vehicle. See Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-9 for more information.
Rotate Control To Off Position
If your vehicle has the keyless access system,
this message displays when the ignition is in
ACC/ACCESSORY and the shift lever has just been
moved to PARK (P). The message displays as a
reminder to turn the ignition off. To avoid draining the
battery, make sure the ignition is turned off before
leaving the vehicle.
Remote Key Learning Active
If your vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, this message displays while matching new
transmitters to the vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s)
to Your Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Service Air Bag
This message displays when there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more information.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service A/C System
Service Battery Charging System
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in
heating and air conditioning efficiency.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging systems. Driving with
this problem could drain the battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical
system checked by your dealer/retailer. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in
the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
Service All Wheel Drive
This message displays if a problem occurs with the
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system. Your vehicle will run in
2WD. This could be caused by:
Service Brake Assist
• An electronics problem
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. The brake system warning light and the
antilock brake system (ABS) warning light may also
display on the instrument panel cluster. See Brake
information. If this happens, stop as soon as possible
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and
check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message displays or appears again when you begin
driving, the brake system needs service. See your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible. See Brakes
on page 5-40 for more information.
• An AWD system oil overheat
• Worn out or overheated clutch plates
• Various electrical issues
If this message appears, stop as soon as possible and
turn off the ignition for 30 seconds. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the system needs service. See
your dealer/retailer right away.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays if a problem is detected with the
speed variable assist steering system. When this
message is displayed, you may notice that the effort
required to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier,
but you will still be able to steer the vehicle.
Service Brake System
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on. See
information. Have the brake system serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
Service StabiliTrak®
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the StabiliTrak® system.
Service Keyless Start System
If this message comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the ignition off then back
on. If this message still stays on or comes back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the StabiliTrak® system inspected by your
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when there is a problem with
this feature. See your dealer/retailer.
Service Parking Assist
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system
to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
your dealer/retailer for service.
Service Theft Deterrent System
This message displays when there is a problem with the
theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A fault
has been detected in the system which means that
the system is disabled and it is not protecting the
vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may
want to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before
turning off the engine. See Immobilizer Operation (Key
Service Power Steering
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Tire Monitor System
Shift To Park (Automatic
Transmission Only)
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-40. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-71 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays if the vehicle is not in PARK (P) while
the engine is being turned off. The vehicle will be in
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the shift lever is moved to
PARK (P), the ignition needs to be turned off. If the
ignition is not turned off, the vehicle will remain in
ACC/ACCESSORY. To avoid draining the battery, make
sure the ignition is turned off before leaving the vehicle.
Service Traction Control
Speed Limited To XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when there is a problem with the
Traction Control System (TCS). When this message
displays, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for service.
more information.
This message displays when your vehicle speed is
limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the speed variable assist steering,
magnetic ride control, or automatic leveling control
systems. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
Service Transmission
Sport Mode
This message displays when there is a problem with the
vehicle’s transmission. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when the vehicle is in sport
mode. See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)” under Automatic
information.
Service Vehicle Soon
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® Competitive Mode
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
This message displays when the Competitive Driving
mode is selected. When in this mode, the Traction
Control System (TCS) will not be operating and the TCS
warning light will turn on. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See “Competitive Driving Mode” under Traction
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
• The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
StabiliTrak® Not Ready
• The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
This message may display after first driving the vehicle
and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.
The StabiliTrak® system is not functional until the
page 4-8 for more information.
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
StabiliTrak® Off
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
This message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak®,
or when the stability control has been automatically
disabled. To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits
of the stability enhancement system, you should
normally leave StabiliTrak® on. However, you should
turn StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle gets stuck in
sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want to rock your
vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving
in extreme off-road conditions and require more wheel
spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Start Aborted By Theft Deterrent
This message displays if there is a communication
problem between the keyless access system and the
vehicle. The vehicle cannot be started when this
message displays. See your dealer/retailer for service.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theft Attempted
Transmission Hot Idle Engine
This message displays if the theft-deterrent system has
detected a break-in attempt while you were away
page 2-27 for more information.
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow
it to idle until the transmission cools down or until this
message is removed.
Tighten Gas Cap
Trunk Open
This message displays when the fuel cap has not been
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it
is on and tightened properly.
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely.
Tire Learning Active
Turn Signal On
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on
your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
information.
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn
signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on. A multiple chime
sounds when this message displays.
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid
This message displays when your vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield washer
fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Windshield
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature Settings Menu Items
DIC Vehicle Customization
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
Your vehicle has customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
Customization features can only be programmed to
one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
Display In English
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear
back to English.
All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until the Press V To
Display In English screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to select English as
the language in which all DIC messages will appear.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
Display Language
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
Press the customization button until the Display
Language screen appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
English (default): All messages will appear in English.
Deutsch: All messages will appear in German.
Italiano: All messages will appear in Italian.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Francais: All messages will appear in French.
Espanol: All messages will appear in Spanish.
Portugese: All messages will appear in Portugese.
Arabic: All messages will appear in Arabic.
Chinese: All messages will appear in Chinese.
Japanese: All messages will appear in Japanese.
At Vehicle Speed (default on Manual
Transmission): The vehicle’s doors automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h) for
three seconds.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Auto Door Unlock
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
door(s) will automatically unlock. It also allows you to
select which doors and when they will automatically
page 2-18 for more information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Auto Door Lock
Press the customization button until Auto Door Unlock
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s doors
will automatically lock. See Programmable Automatic
Press the customization button until Auto Door Lock
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Off: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
Driver At Off: Only the driver’s door will unlock when
the ignition is turned off.
Shift Out Of Park (default on Automatic
Driver In Park (Automatic Transmission Only): Only
the driver’s door will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into PARK (P).
Transmission) (Automatic Transmission Only): The
vehicle’s doors automatically lock when the doors
are closed and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All At Off (default on Manual Transmission): All of
the doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Lights Only: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the transmitter.
All In Park (default on Automatic Transmission)
(Automatic Transmission Only): All of the doors will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Horn Only: The horn will sound on the second press of
the lock button on the transmitter.
Horn & Lights (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the lock button on the transmitter,
and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed
again within five seconds of the previous command.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Remote Door Lock
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access
transmitter, or when the vehicle is automatically locked
using the Keyless Locking feature. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
Locking” later in this section for more information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Remote Door Unlock
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access
transmitter, or when the vehicle is automatically
unlocked using the Keyless Unlock feature. You will not
receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
Unlock” later in this section for more information.
Press the customization button until Remote Door Lock
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Off: There will be no feedback when you press the lock
button on the transmitter.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until Remote Door
Unlock appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
ignition for this feature to work. On vehicles with the
Keyless Access System, the vehicle must be off and the
keyless access transmitter must be removed from the
vehicle for this feature to work. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power
door lock switch twice or the lock button on the
more information.
Lights Off: The exterior lamps will not flash when you
press the unlock button on the transmitter.
Lights On (default): The exterior lamps will flash when
you press the unlock button on the transmitter.
Press the customization button until Delay Door Lock
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Off: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
Delay Door Lock
On (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed. When
locking the doors with the power door lock switch and a
door is open, this feature will delay locking the doors
until five seconds after the last door is closed. You will
hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. On vehicles with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) system, the key must be out of the
after the last door is closed.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exit Lighting
Approach Lighting
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access transmitter.
Press the customization button until Exit Lighting
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until Approach Lighting
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Off: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
Off: The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock
the vehicle with the transmitter.
30 Seconds (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
On (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the transmitter.
1 Minute: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is
no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
2 Minutes: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do not press the set/reset button, Feature
Settings Press V To Exit appears on the DIC display.
See “Feature Settings Exit” below for more information.
Factory Settings
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
Feature Settings Exit
Press the customization button until Factory Settings
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
Press the customization button until Feature Settings
Press V To Exit appears in the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to exit the menu.
Restore All (default): The customization features will
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
be set to their factory default settings.
Do Not Restore: The customization features will not be
set to their factory default settings.
Advanced Features Menu Items
Keyless Locking
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
feature allows you to select whether the doors
automatically lock during normal vehicle exit. When the
ignition is turned off and all doors become closed,
the vehicle will determine how many keyless access
transmitters remain in the vehicle interior. If at least
one keyless access transmitter has been removed from
the interior of the vehicle, the doors will lock after
several seconds.
Advanced Features
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to enter the
advanced features menu.
Press the customization button until Advanced Features
Press V To Enter appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the advanced
feature menu. See “Advanced Features Menu Items”
later in this section for more information.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, if there are two keyless access
The doors will automatically lock several seconds after
you turn the ignition off, remove a keyless access
transmitter from the interior of the vehicle, and close all
of the doors.
transmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, the
other will be locked in. The keyless access transmitter
locked in the vehicle can still be used to start the vehicle
or unlock the doors, if needed. A person approaching
the outside of the locked vehicle without an authorized
keyless access transmitter, however, will not be able
to open the door, even with a transmitter in the vehicle.
for more information.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Keyless Unlock
You may temporarily disable the keyless locking feature
by pressing the door unlock switch for three seconds
on an open door. Keyless locking will then remain
disabled until a door lock switch is pressed or until the
power mode transitions from the off power mode.
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
feature allows you to select which doors will
automatically unlock when you approach the vehicle
with the keyless access transmitter and open the driver’s
page 2-9 for more information.
To select whether the horn sounds or the lights flash
when the vehicle is locked, see “Remote Door
Lock” earlier in this section.
To select whether the lights flash when the vehicle is
unlocked, see “Remote Door Unlock” earlier in this
section.
Press the customization button until Keyless Locking
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until Keyless Unlock
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Off (default): The keyless locking feature will be
disabled.
Off: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
On: The keyless locking feature will be enabled.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entry Door Only: Only the driver’s door will
automatically unlock when you approach the vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter and open the driver’s door.
Electronic Key Reminder On (default): The horn will
chirp three times when a keyless access transmitter
is inside of the vehicle while the ignition is turned off and
the driver’s door is closed.
All Doors (default): All doors will automatically unlock
when you approach the vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter and open the driver or front
passenger door.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Chime Volume
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Electronic Key Reminder
Press the customization button until Chime Volume
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
If your vehicle has the keyless access system, this
feature allows you to select whether or not the horn
chirps when the driver’s door is closed and there is a
keyless access transmitter inside the interior of the
vehicle. This will only occur when the vehicle is off.
Normal: The chime volume will be set to a
Press the customization button until Electronic
Key Reminder appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
normal level.
Loud: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
Electronic Key Reminder Off: The horn will not chirp
when a keyless access transmitter is inside of the
vehicle while the ignition is turned off and the driver’s
door is closed.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park Tilt Mirrors
Easy Exit Recall
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt
down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
information.
Press the customization button until Park Tilt Mirrors
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until Easy Exit Recall
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Off (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
Door Button Only: No automatic seat exit recall will
occur. The recall will only occur after pressing the easy
exit seat button.
Driver Mirror: The driver’s outside mirror will be tilted
down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
Button And Automatic (Keyless Access default): If
the features are enabled though the Easy Exit Setup
menu, the driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle
has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature,
the power steering column will move up and forward
when the vehicle is parked and the driver door is opened,
or after pressing the easy exit seat button.
Passenger Mirror: The passenger’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
Both Mirrors: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the driver door is opened. If the automatic
movement has already occurred, and you close and then
open the driver door, the seat and steering column will
stay in the original exit position, unless a memory recall
took place prior to opening the driver door again.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Button And Automatic (Key Access default): If the
features are enabled though the Easy Exit Setup menu,
the driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle
has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature,
the power steering column will move up and forward
when the key is removed from the ignition or after
pressing the easy exit seat button. The automatic easy
exit seat movement will only occur one time after
the key is removed from the ignition. If the automatic
movement has already occurred, and you put the
key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat
and steering column will stay in the original exit position,
unless a memory recall took place prior to removing
the key again.
Press the customization button until Easy Exit Setup
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Off: No automatic seat exit will recall.
Seat Only: The driver’s seat will recall.
Tilt Only: The steering wheel tilt feature will recall.
Telescope Only: The steering column telescope
feature will recall.
Seat/Tilt: The driver’s seat and the steering wheel tilt
feature will recall.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Seat/Telescope: The driver’s seat and the steering
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
column telescope feature will recall.
Tilt/Telescope: The steering wheel tilt and steering
Easy Exit Setup
column telescope features will recall.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat
feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic
easy exit feature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors
on page 1-6 and “Easy Exit Recall” earlier for more
information.
All (default): The driver’s seat and the steering wheel
tilt and steering column telescope features will recall,
if your vehicle has this option.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Seat Recall
Remote Start
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the remote memory seat recall
more information.
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start feature off or on. The remote start
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of
the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
or keyless access transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start
on page 2-14 for more information.
Press the customization button until Memory Seat
Recall appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until Remote Start
appears in the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Off (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.
On: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors will
automatically move to the stored driving position when
the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) or keyless access transmitter is pressed. The
steering column will also move on vehicles with
the power tilt and telescopic steering feature. See Power
page 3-7 for more information. See “Relearn Remote
for more information on matching transmitters to
driver ID numbers.
Off: The remote start feature will be disabled.
On (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Features Exit
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
This feature allows you to exit the advanced
features menu.
Press the customization button until Advanced Features
Press V To Exit appears in the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to exit the menu. Feature
Settings Press V To Exit will appear. Press the set/reset
button to exit the menu.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the menu.
Exiting the Feature Settings/Advanced
Features Menu
The feature settings/advanced features menus will be
exited when any of the following occurs:
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While your vehicle is parked:
Radio(s)
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Full View of Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD similar
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB utilizes
Gracenote® technology to provide Song, Artist, Album,
and Genre information for many CD audio discs
and is capable of playing DVD-A and DTS encoded
discs, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).
Manufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories.
Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby® Laboratories.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Partial View of Radio with DVD Audio, Hard Disc
Drive (HDD), and USB
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS)
feature. RDS is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
only works when the information is available. While the
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station
name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station
can broadcast incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Your vehicle may have one of these radios as its audio
system.
If your vehicle does not have one of these radio
systems, it may have a navigation radio system. See
the Navigation System manual for more information on
the navigation audio system.
If your vehicle has one of these radios, it has either a
Bose® sound system or a Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround®
sound system. See “Digital Signal Processing (DSP)”
later in this section for more information on the
Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround® sound system.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Noise Compensation Technology: If your vehicle has
the Radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB, it includes
Bose AudioPilot® noise compensation technology.
When turned on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the
audio system equalization, to compensate for
background noise.
Playing the Radio
VOL P (Volume/Power): The power knob is part of
the VOL (volume) knob and is located above the
radio, at the left side of the clock. Press to turn the
system on and off.
Turn the VOL knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
This feature is most effective at lower radio volume
settings where background noise can affect how well
you hear the music being played through your vehicle’s
audio system. At higher volume settings, where the
music is much louder than the background noise, there
might be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot®. For
additional information on AudioPilot®, visit
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): A Radio with
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
adjusts the sound to compensate for road and wind
noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down, so that
the volume is consistent while driving. That way,
the volume level should sound about the same as you
drive. To activate SCV:
www.bose.com/audiopilot.
To activate AudioPilot®:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
1. Press the CONFIG button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the CONFIG button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOL label
on the radio display.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOL
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.
3. Press either the On or Off label located under the
AUTO VOL display to turn this feature on or off.
The display times out after approximately
10 seconds.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For XM™ stations, the music guide displays a Category
list. This list displays all of the Categories available
and the number of XM™ stations available under each.
Finding a Station
TUNE/TONE: Turn to select different radio stations
within a selected band.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to scroll through the list. Press this
knob to select the desired item. The selected item
displays a speaker symbol to indicate it is the current
active source.
FM/AM: Press to switch between FM and AM
radio bands.
© SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous
or to the next radio station and stay there.
Finding a XM™ Station
The radio only tunes into stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
m: Press to switch to XM™ mode. Turn the TUNE/
TONE knob to select from a list of available XM stations.
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob until the desired station is
highlighted. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to select
the highlighted station. The highlighted station will also
automatically be selected if the TUNE/TONE is
released and no longer turned.
INFO (Information) (FM-RDS, XM™ Satellite Radio
Service, CD-Text, CD Gracenote Database, HDD,
MP3/WMA, and iPod): Press to display additional text
information related to the currently playing content.
When information is not available, No Information
displays.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
MENU/SELECT: For FM/AM stations, the MENU/
SELECT displays a list of available radio stations. Under
this menu, there is a refresh list selection that allows
the user to update the list for all available stations that
the radio is able to receive at the current location.
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is stopped. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels on
the display and by using the radio favorites page button
(FAV button). Press the FAV button to go through up
to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each page of favorites
can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM™
(if equipped) stations.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming your favorites for the
chosen number of pages.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
To store a station as a favorite, perform the
following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the TUNE/TONE
knob until the tone control labels display. Continue
pressing to highlight the desired label, or press
the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn
the TUNE/TONE knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting
can also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the
station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed and
released, the radio recalls the station that was set.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
to be stored as a favorite.
\ FWD, or s REV button until the desired
levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak or
has static, decrease the treble.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
CONFIG button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep may sound and the level adjusts to the
middle position.
1. Press the CONFIG button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV label.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the TUNE/TONE knob for
more than two seconds.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
If your radio has this feature, it is used to provide a
choice of different listening experiences. To choose a
DSP setting, perform the following steps:
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to display the
tone/speaker, and DSP labels.
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the TUNE/TONE knob until the speaker
control labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the
desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned
under the desired label. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can be adjusted by
2. Press the pushbutton located under the DSP label.
3. Press the Back button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the Back button or wait for the display to time out.
The DSP settings available are:
pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV
buttons until the desired levels are obtained.
• Normal: Select for normal mode, this provides the
best sound quality for all seating positions.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep may
sound and the level adjusts to the middle position.
• Driver: Select to adjust the audio for the driver to
receive the best possible sound quality.
• Rear: Select to adjust the audio for the rear seat
passengers to receive the best possible sound
quality.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the TUNE/TONE knob for
more than two seconds.
• Centerpoint®: Select to enable Bose®
Centerpoint®. Centerpoint® produces a full vehicle
surround sound listening experience from CD,
non-5.1 surround sound DVD-A, MP3/WMA, AUX
(auxiliary) input, or XM™ digital audio source
and will deliver five independent audio channels
from conventional two channel stereo recording.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This feature is not available in AM/FM radio mode.
Radio Message
If your vehicle is equipped with the Bose® 5.1 Cabin
Surround® sound system, your radio can support
the playback of 5.1 Surround Sound DVD-A discs or
DTS 5.1 Surround Sound CD discs. When a 5.1
Surround Sound formatted disc is playing, DSP
options available are:
Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK® system has
locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer/
retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
− 5.1 Surround + Normal: Best for all seating
positions.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
− 5.1 Surround + Rear: Best for the rear seating
position.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free music,
Configuring Radio Functions
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your
trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM™ Radio Online for when you are not in
your vehicle. A service fee is required to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™
at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the
U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in
Canada.
CONFIG: Press to display FAV, AUTO VOL, XM (if
equipped), or HDD (if available), and Back. See
the information provided in this radio section to learn
more options about the FAV, AUTO VOL, XM, and HDD
(if available) label functions. See “Speed Compensated
Volume (SCV)” or “Noise Compensation Technology”
earlier for information on the AUTO VOL label. Press the
pushbutton located under the Back label to go back to
the previous display.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
section for further detail.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
Playing a CD (Single Disc Player)
1. Press and hold this button for five seconds. A beep
sounds and Load All Discs displays.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in. The CD track number and a Shuffle
label displays. The CD begins playback.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
Shuffle: Press the pushbutton located below the
Shuffle label to play the tracks of a CD in random order.
Press again to turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
^ (Load): Press to load CDs into the CD player. This
CD player holds up to six CDs.
When a CD is inserted, the disc number displays on the
upper right side of the screen and the track number
displays at the left and center of the screen. The Shuffle
and Disc labels appear below. Press the pushbuttons
located under the Disc label to change to another
disc. The CD begins playback of the first track on the
selected disc. As each new track starts to play the track
number displays in the left and center of the screen.
To insert one CD:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in. A
Shuffle label and the DISC icon displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located below the Shuffle
label to play the tracks of a current disc in random
order. Press the pushbutton again to turn Shuffle off.
Shuffle Off displays.
Shuffle: Press the pushbutton located below the Shuffle
label to play the tracks of a CD in random order.
Press again to turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays
5. The CD resumes normal playback.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
Z (Eject): To eject the disc that is currently playing,
press and release. Ejecting Disc displays and a beep
sounds. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays.
The disc can be removed. If the disc is not removed,
after several seconds, the disc automatically pulls back
into the player and begins playing.
CD: Press to play a CD when listening to the radio.
The disc and/or track number displays when a CD is in
the player.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to automatically search for
an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device Found” displays.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than five seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If
either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
Playing a DVD-A (Audio) Disc
The radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB is capable of
playing DVD audio discs in the Bose® 5.1 Cabin
surround sound system.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
Insert the DVD audio disc into the CD/DVD-A player.
DVD AUDIO displays and playback begins. The Group
and track number displays during playback.
This type of radio does not support the playback of DVD
video discs. If you attempt to play a DVD video disc,
the radio displays “Read Error Please Check Disc” and
ejects the disc.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to switch between
CD/DVD-A, auxiliary input, and USB devices.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to reverse playback
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Press once to change playback to a speed
of 2X. Each successive press changes playback
to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X. Press r / j
(play/pause) to resume normal playback. The elapsed
time of the track displays.
Press the pushbutton located under the c label again
while in DVDPreStop, “DVDStop” displays. Press r
/ j while in DVDStop to begin playback from the
beginning of the DVD audio disc.
Press r / j during DVD audio playback to pause or
resume playback.
While recording a disc to HDD, the fast reverse does
not function.
Finding Songs on DVD Audio
TUNE/TONE: Turn this knob to display a list of all
tracks in all groups on the DVD audio disc. Stop turning
this knob or press the TUNE/TONE knob to start
playback of a particular track.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Press once to change playback to a speed
of 2X. Each successive press changes playback
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than five seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If
either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks within the current Group.
to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X. Press r / j to resume
normal playback. The elapsed time of the track
displays.
While recording a disc to HDD, the fast forward does
not function.
Stopping DVD Audio Playback
MENU/SELECT: To change Groups, press the
pushbutton located under the Menu label to display a
list of all Groups. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the desired Group. Press the MENU/SELECT
knob to select it. Playback begins from track 1 of
the selected Group.
Press the pushbutton located under the c (stop) label
to stop playback of the DVD audio disc. “DVD PreStop”
displays. Press r / j to resume playback from
where it was stopped.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shuffle on DVD Audio
Care of Your CD and DVD-A Discs
Press the pushbutton located under the Shuffle label to
begin random playback of all songs in the current
Group. Press again to turn off random playback.
If playing a CD or DVD-A disc, the sound quality can be
reduced due to disc quality, the method of recording,
the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the
way the disc has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store disc(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD/DVD-A player scans the bottom surface of the disc.
If the surface of a disc is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the disc may not play properly or
not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a disc
while handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the
hole and the outer edge.
Selecting DVD Audio Streams
Each DVD audio Group may contain audio content that
is encoded in one or two formats. For example, a
particular Group may have both a 5.1 surround audio
stream and a 2.0 stereo audio stream available.
Press the pushbutton located under the Audio label to
display the current audio stream playing. “Audio
Stream 1” or “Audio Stream 2” briefly displays. Press
the pushbutton located under the Audio label again
to toggle between Audio Stream 1 or Audio Stream 2
(if available).
If the surface of a disc is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
Check the DSP settings to determine if a 5.1 surround
sound Audio Stream is playing. See “Digital Signal
Processing (DSP)” earlier in this section. Press the DSP
label to see if the 5.1 + Normal or 5.1 + Rear settings
are available for selection. If these settings are available,
Audio Stream 1 is playing.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CD or DVD-A Player
Disc Messages
Do not add any label to a disc, it could get caught in the
CD/DVD-A player. If a disc is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is needed, label the top
of the recorded disc with a marking pen.
DISC ERROR: If this message displays and/or the disc
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• The radio system does not support the playlist
format, the compressed audio format, or the data file
format.
The use of disc lens cleaners for discs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the disc
optics with lubricants internal to the CD/DVD-A player
mechanism.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the disc.
If an error displays, see “Disc Messages” later in this
section.
• The label could be caught in the CD/DVD-A player.
If the disc is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good disc.
Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing an
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. Radios with the
DVD Audio feature, are capable of playing MP3/WMA
on DVD+/-R discs. For more information, see Using
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stopping the Recording
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
While recording from the audio CD, press the REC
button to display the stop recording option. Press the
pushbutton located under this option to confirm the
selection.
Radios with a hard disk drive are able to record songs
from Audio CDs, MP3/WMA discs, and USB mass
storage devices. This type of radio has a 40 GB
(gigabyte) HDD. A portion of the HDD is used for the
storage of radio system files. The remainder of the HDD
capacity is available for the storage of media files.
Ejecting a CD or Turning Off Your Vehicle
While Recording
Recording From Audio CDs
If the CD is ejected or the vehicle is turned off before
the recording process has completed, tracks that
have been completely recorded are stored to the HDD.
Incomplete tracks are discarded.
REC (Record): While listening to an audio CD, press to
start recording songs from the disc. The radio has the
option to record the current song playing or all songs
from the CD. Press the pushbutton located under
the desired record option.
Re-recording Audio CDs
If a CD has already been recorded, the radio system
will not record the contents again. If a partially recorded
CD is selected for recording, only those songs which
are not already on the HDD will be recorded.
A status bar appears on the top of the display when the
recording process starts. The status bar disappears
when the process has ended. The recorded songs are
now available.
Audio CD Song, Artist, Album and Genre
Information
Copy Protected CD(s)
Make sure the disc is not copy-protected. The radio
does not copy a copy-protected CD to the HDD.
Radios with HDD, contain a Gracenote® Database that
the radio uses to determine the song, artist, album
and genre information. The Gracenote® Database allows
the radio to record an audio CD to the HDD and store
the content using song, artist, album and genre
information.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gracenote® Database
Newly released audio CDs as well as some less
common audio CDs may not be found in the Gracenote®
Database stored on the HDD. If these audio CDs
contain CD-text, the radio will use the CD-text
information when recording the content to the HDD. If
an audio CD is not found in the Gracenote® Database
and it does not have CD-text information, the radio
will record the audio CD with all song, artist, album and
genre names as “NO INFO”.
Gracenote Music Recognition Service, Music recognition
technology, and related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in
music recognition technology and related content
delivery. For more information, visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of the following
U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773,
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some
services supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Songs recorded with “NO INFO” to the HDD will be hard
to sort, identify, and select. For better HDD navigation,
CDs with “NO INFO” can first be converted to MP3
format with Tag information on a home computer and
then recorded to the HDD from an MP3 disc or
USB device.
Occasionally, the radio may find more than one match
in Gracenote® Database for an audio CD that has
been recorded. If this happens, the radio will display
“MultiHit” for the name information when the songs are
selected from the HDD. With a “MuliHit” song playing,
press the button below the EDIT label to bring up the list
of multiple names found in the Gracenote® Database.
Use the Menu/Select knob to highlight and select
the correct name for the “MultiHit” recorded CD.
The Gracenote® Database stored on your HDD can be
updated so that it includes name information for
more recently released audio CDs. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on Gracenote®
Database updates for your HDD radio.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of
Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
If you require more information regarding the use of the
Gracenote Service, visit: www.gracenote.com/corporate
For the data provided by Gracenote® Music
Recognition Service, the content is not necessarily
guaranteed 100%.
Regarding the use of Gracenote Music Recognition
Service. When this product is used, it is necessary to
agree to the following articles.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This application or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers,
including all ownership rights.
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote
Software”) enables this application to perform disc
and/or file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title
information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or
embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”)
and to perform other functions.
Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable
for any payment to you for any information that you
provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
rights under this Agreement against you directly in its
own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes.
You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the
intended End-User functions of this application or
device. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your
own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party.
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier
is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries
without knowing anything about who you are. For more
information, see the web page for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote
Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no
representations or warranties, express or implied,
regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in
the Gracenote Servers.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE,
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. You agree that
your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license
terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the
Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any
cause that Gracenote deems sufficient.
No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or
Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to
discontinue its services at any time.
A status bar appears on the top of the display when the
recording process starts. The status bar disappears
when the process has ended. The recorded songs are
now available.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
AAC and OGG Vorbis file types are not fully supported.
These file types may or may not play and may be
shown without Tag information. Without Tag information
available, these file types may be identified only by
filename.
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE
SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
Audiobooks from www.audible.com can also be
transferred to the HDD using the record function. See
Audiobooks later in this section for more information.
USB Host Support
The USB connector uses the USB standards, 1.1 and
2.0. This type of connector supports rates for low speed
(1.5 Mb/s), full speed (12 Mb/s), and high speed
(480 Mb/s).
Recording From MP3/WMA Discs
or USB
USB Supported Devices
• USB Flash Drives
REC (Record): While listening to a MP3/WMA disc or a
USB device (excluding iPod), press to start recording
songs from the disc. The radio has the option to record
the current song playing or all songs from the disc.
Press the pushbutton located under the desired record
option.
• Portable USB Hard Drives
Playing From the Hard Disc Drive
HDD (Hard Disc Drive): Press the HDD button to start
the HDD mode. HDD displays and playback resumes
from where it was last stopped.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD Playback Mode
HDD Menu
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to display the
HDD Menu.
This radio system displays the current hard drive
playback mode. See the following table showing the
display mode options and what happens as the mode is
displayed:
2. Turn this knob to highlight an option from the HDD
Menu. The available options are:
• Shuffle Songs
• Playlist
Mode
When Displayed
System is randomly playing back
all HDD content.
System is playing back content
by a selected Artist in
alphabetical order.
System is playing back content
from a selected album in track
order.
System is playing back content in
a selected Genre in alphabetical
order.
System is playing back all songs
in alphabetical order.
Shuffle
• Artists
• Albums
Artist
• Song Titles
• Genres
Album
Genre
• Recently Saved
• Audiobook
3. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to select the
desired option.
Song
Shuffle Songs
Playlist
System is playing back all songs
from the selected playlist in the
order they were added.
System is playing back audio
book content.
Select this option from the HDD Menu to randomly play
back HDD content.
AudioBook
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select the HDD Menu category to display the available
items in each individual category, then select an
item from one of these submenus to display a list of
songs related to that menu item. Select a song to begin
playback of that song and to put the HDD in the
playback mode.
Playlist
Select this option from the HDD Menu to display all
six favorite Playlists, then select one of the six playlist to
display a list of songs that have been added to that
favorite playlist. Select a song from the list to begin
playback of that song and to put the HDD into the
Playlist mode. See “Saving HDD Favorites” later in this
section for more information.
Recently Saved
Select this option from the HDD Menu to display the last
50 songs added since the vehicle was last turned on.
The songs are categorized into songs recorded
from CDs or USB devices.
HDD Categories
The HDD category mode can be used to select a song by
a particular artist, album, or genre for playback. As an
example, the HDD Menu displays a layout such as:
Audiblebook
The radio is able to play back audio-book content
downloaded from www.audible.com®. This content can
be transferred into the HDD by either burning it to a
CD or copying it to a USB storage device and then
recording it to the HDD.
— Artists (5)
— Albums (6)
— Song Titles (77)
— Genres (3)
The audible.com® playback requires activation of the
vehicle as a player for downloaded content. The
radio system activates the audible.com® system when
information is found on either a CD inserted into
the CD/DVD-A player or if a USB storage device is
connected. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
number is a required in order to activate your vehicle.
The radio system displays the number of available items
in each individual category as shown on the sample
display. For example, the sample display shows there is
content on the hard drive from five individual artists.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving HDD Favorites
Configuring HDD Favorites
During HDD playback, press the FAV button to change
between favorite modes. The following favorite modes
are supported:
Press the CONFIG button to display the radio
configuration options. Press the pushbutton under the
HDD label to display the available favorite modes. Press
the pushbutton under the favorite label to set the
available favorite modes. Available favorite modes are
highlighted.
• Playlists
• Artists
• Albums
• Genres
Time-shifting — Pause and Rewind Live
FM/AM and XM™ (if equipped)
Favorites can be saved by pressing and holding the
pushbutton located under the favorites selection. Store
your favorites according to the following table:
The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB has the
ability to rewind 60 minutes of FM/AM and XM
(if equipped) content. While listening to the radio, the
content from the current station is always being buffered
to the HDD.
Favorites
Display Mode
Action on Press-and-Hold
Press r / j (play/pause) To pause the radio. The
radio display will show the Time Shift buffer status bar.
The status bar shows the amount of content that is
stored in the buffer and the current pause point.
Adds currently playing track to
the playlist selected.
Playlist
Saves the artist associated with
the currently playing track in the
indicated favorites position.
Artist
To resume playback from the current pause point, press
Saves the album associated with
the currently playing track in the
indicated favorites position.
Saves the genre associated with
the currently playing track in the
indicated favorites position.
r / j again. The radio will no longer be playing
“live” radio. Instead, time shifted content is being played
from the buffer. When the radio is playing time shifted
content from the buffer, a buffer status bar shows below
the station number on the left side of screen.
Album
Genre
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold the REV or FWD buttons to rewind or
fast forward through the time shift buffer. Hold FWD until
the end of the currently recorded buffer to resume
“live” radio playback. With “live” radio playing, the radio
display will no longer show the buffer bar below the
station number.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack. It is in the
center console bin. This is not an audio output; do
not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input
jack. An external audio device such as an iPod,
laptop computer, MP3 player, etc. can be connected to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for
audio listening.
On AM/FM, press the REV or FWD button multiple
times to rewind or fast forward. Each press will rewind
or fast forward 30 seconds of content. On XM, press the
REV or FWD button multiple time to jump to the
previous or next song or commercial.
Set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is stopped.
on driver distraction.
When the radio station is changed, the buffer is cleared
and automatically restarted for the current station.
You cannot rewind to content from a previously tuned
station.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
The radio automatically detects the device and “Aux
Input Device” displays. The device begins playing over
the vehicle speakers. If an auxiliary device has
already been connected, press the radio’s AUX or
CD/AUX button.
Time shifting of AM/FM or XM is not available while
recording or while other sources of playback are
selected.
Pausing AM/FM or XM™ (if equipped) with
the Vehicle Turned Off
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Use the portable device to make
additional volume adjustments.
If AM/FM or XM is paused when the vehicle is turned
off, the radio will continue to buffer the current radio
station for up to one hour. If the vehicle is turned back
on within one hour, the radio will automatically
resume playback from the pause point.
FM/AM: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, until you stop it.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD or CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD
when a portable audio device is playing. Press again to
start playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Device” displays.
port and the auxiliary input jack. The USB port and the
auxiliary input jack are located in the center console bin. If
the vehicle is on and the USB connection works, you will
see a GM logo appear on your iPod. Your iPod music will
display on your radio’s display and begin playing through
your vehicle radio system.
Using the Radio Controls to Connect
and Control Your iPod
A standard iPod USB cable, like the one that came with
your iPod, cannot be used to connect an iPod to your
vehicle. You must use the iPod connection cable
that was purchased with your vehicle or that was made
available from your dealer/retailer in order for this
feature to work.
You can control your iPod using the radio buttons and
knobs and display your iPod song information on
the radio’s display. To connect and control your iPod
using the radio controls, your vehicle must have a USB
port. If it does, it is located in the center console bin.
You will also need a special iPod connection cable that
can be purchased with your vehicle or may be
available after, from your dealer/retailer. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Use the radio Menu/Select knob to bring up the iPod
Menu and select Songs, Artists, Albums, Playlists
and Audio books to play from your iPod.
Your iPod will charge while it is connected to your
vehicle and if your vehicle is turned to
This feature supports the following iPod models:
• Fifth generation or later iPod
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN. It can also be left
connected to your vehicle while the vehicle is turned off
or removed. With the vehicle turned off, the iPod will
automatically be powered off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle’s battery.
• First or Second generation or later iPod Nano*
* For proper operation, make sure your iPod has the
latest firmware from Apple®. Your iPod firmware can be
updated using the latest iTunes application. See
www.apple.com/itunes.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported or
do not have the special iPod connection cable, you
can still listen to your iPod in your vehicle by connecting
it to the Auxiliary Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) stereo cable. See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack” earlier for more information.
To connect and control your iPod, connect one end of the
specially purchased iPod connection cable to the iPod’s
dock connector. Connect the other end to both the USB
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the AM/FM, XM or HDD buttons to listen to one
of these sources while an iPod is connected. If a disc is
inserted, press the CD/AUX button to listen to a CD
or DVD-A disc. Press the CD/AUX button again to start
playing and controlling the connected iPod.
Creating an MP3/WMA Disc
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
To properly dismount the iPod USB device before
disconnecting from the vehicle, press the button directly
under the EJECT label found on the iPod playback
screen.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• Make sure the CD does not have more than a
maximum of 50 folders and playlists, and 255 files to
read and play.
Using an MP3
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
MP3/WMA Format
The Single CD and the Six-Disc CD Radio will play
MP3/WMA files that were recorded on a CD-R or
CD-RW disc. The HDD Radio is similar and can also
play MP3/WMA files recorded on DVD +/− R discs or a
USB storage device.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, keep the total number of
folders to a minimum to reduce the complexity and
confusion during playback.
The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit
rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,
96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
Song title, artist name, and album can display when
files are recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions may not work).
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
contained directly under the root directory are accessed
prior to any root directory folders. Playlists (Px) are
always accessed after root folders or files.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions.
The HDD Radio displays the root directory of an
MP3/WMA disc as F1 MP3 and the root directory of a
USB storage device as F1 USB.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Adding
music to an existing disc can cause the disc not
to function.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files.
Playlists can be selected by using the previous and next
folder buttons, the SEEK arrows, \ FWD, or s
REV buttons. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was
recorded using no file folders can also be played. If
a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of
50 folders and playlists, and 255 files, the player lets
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but
all items over the maximum are not accessible.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. The radio displays
F1 DISC for the root directory.
The HDD Radio can support more than 255 files on an
MP3/WMA disc.
The HDD Radio does not support playlists on a disc or
USB storage device.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. The radio displays F1 DISC for the root directory.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays as F1 DISC. All files
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Track names longer than 32 characters are shortened.
Parts of words on the last page of text and the
extension of the filename is not displayed.
Order of Play
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW play in the
following order:
The HDD Radio will display file names with the
extension.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first playlist.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are special folders
containing compressed audio song files. Playlists must
have a file extension of PLS or M3U.
− Playlists can be changed by pressing the next
and previous folder button.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
Playlists can be selected using the previous and next
folder buttons. Tracks can be changed by pressing
the seek buttons or turning the tune knob. Songs are
played sequentially; press the s REV or \ FWD to
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
reverse or advance through the playing song.
The HDD Radio does not support preprogrammed
playlists. To create a playlist on the HDD radio from
songs recorded to the HDD, see “Saving HDD Favorites”
earlier in this section.
File System and Naming
The song name displays the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not in the
ID3 tag, the radio displays the file name without the
extension.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TUNE/TONE: Turn to select MP3/WMA files on the
CD playing.
Playing an MP3/WMA
Insert a CD partway into the slot (Single CD Player), or
press the load button and wait for the message to
insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side up. The
player pulls in the CD and should begin playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current MP3/WMA file, if more than five seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the
next MP3/WMA file. If either arrow is held or pressed
multiple times, the player continues moving backward or
forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.
For the Single CD Player, the track number displays at
the left and center of the screen. A Shuffle label
appears below. Press the pushbutton located under the
Shuffle label to play the MP3/WMA files of the CD in
random order.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
under the Folder label to go to the first track in
the previous folder.
For the Six-Disc CD Player, the disc number displays at
the upper right side of the screen. The track number
displays at the left and center of the screen. The Shuffle,
Disc, and Folder labels appear below. Press the
pushbutton located under the Shuffle label to play the
MP3/WMA files of the currently selected CD in random
order. Press the pushbuttons located under the Disc
or Folder labels to change to another disc or folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton under the
Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. The elapsed time of the file
displays. Release to resume playing the file.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. The elapsed time of the file
displays. Release to resume playing the file.
Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player and begins playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shuffle: With the shuffle setting, MP3/WMA files on the
CD can be played in random, rather than sequential
order, on the CD currently playing. To use shuffle:
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
• To play MP3/WMA files from the CD in random
order, press the pushbutton under the Shuffle
label until Shuffle On displays. Press again to turn
shuffle off.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
xL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
NotFound: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
will alternate with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
Check XM: If this message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver may have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation/Radio System
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the Navigation System manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOC, LOCK, or LOCKED could
display.
Left-Side Steering
Wheel Controls
Right-Side Steering
Wheel Controls
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio AM, FM, XM™ (if equipped), CD, HDD (if
available), auxiliary input jack (if connected), USB and
iPod (if available and connected).
yz (Previous/Next): Press the previous or the next
arrow to go to the previous or to the next radio
station stored as a favorite.
When a CD is playing, press either arrow to go to the
previous or to the next track.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume
button to increase or to decrease the volume.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
g (Mute/Speech Recognition): Press and release
this button to silence the vehicle speakers only.
The audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if your
vehicle has these features, does not mute. Press and
release this button again, to turn the sound on.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press and
hold this button for longer than one second to initiate
speech recognition. See “Speech Recognition” in
the Navigation System manual for more information.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this button
for longer than one second to interact with the OnStar®
system. If your vehicle also has the navigation system,
press and hold this button for longer than one second
to initiate speech recognition and say “OnStar” to enter
in this manual for more information.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or
hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound
to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of
XM signal for a period of time. The radio may
display No XM Signal to indicate interference.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Because this antenna is built into the rear window, there
is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
Backglass Antenna
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged. If
the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do
not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Braking
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the
vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have ABS.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear
the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 4-8. When the TCS/StabiliTrak® warning light is
on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. It will activate and the TCS/StabiliTrak® light
will flash if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction while driving. When this
happens, the system applies the brake to the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
The TCS/StabiliTrak® warning light will flash when the
traction control system is limiting wheel spin.
TCS automatically comes on whenever vehicle is
started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the system on.
But the TCS should be turned off if your vehicle
ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the
vehicle is required. Also, turn the TCS off while in
deep snow or on loose gravel, to assist vehicle motion
at lower speeds. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get
TCS when driving in snowy or icy conditions.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
This warning light will flash
if there is a problem with
the traction control system.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the TC (Traction
Control) button, located on
the instrument panel, to
turn the system off.
Competitive Driving Mode
Press the TC button quickly two times to select this
optional handling mode. The StabiliTrak® Competitive
Mode message displays in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). While in the StabiliTrak® Competitive
Mode, TCS does not operate, and the TCS warning light
comes on. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Press the TC button again, or turn the ignition to
ACC/ACCESSORY, to turn the TCS back on and the
TCS warning light off.
If you press the TC button once, the traction
control system will turn off and the Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light will flash. Press the
TC button again to turn the system back on. Press and
hold the TC button for five seconds or longer, to turn
the StabiliTrak® system off. The TCS/StabiliTrak®
warning light will flash. Press the TC button again to
turn StabiliTrak® back on. For more information,
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the rear
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not
attempt to shift when the rear wheels do not have
traction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is
not covered. See your warranty book for additional
information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system activates, the Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® warning light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes. You may also hear a
noise or feel vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal.
Continue to steer the vehicle in the direction you want
it to go.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, a
Service Stability System message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) and the TCS/StabiliTrak®
warning light flashes on the instrument panel cluster.
When this message and warning light displays, the
system is not operational. Driving should be adjusted
on page 3-29 for more information.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Your vehicle may have this feature. A limited-slip rear
axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice,
sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of
the time, but when one of the rear wheels has no
traction and the other does, this feature will allow the
wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle has an electronic stability control system
called StabiliTrak®. It is an advanced computer
controlled system that assists with directional control of
the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak®
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of
the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the
direction which you are steering.
StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever the
vehicle is started. The system should be left on to help
assist with directional control of the vehicle. If
StabiliTrak® needs to be turned off, press the TC
(traction control) on/off button. See Traction Control
If cruise control is being used when the StabiliTrak®
activates, the cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow, reengage the cruise control.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panic Brake Assist
Steering
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. If the
system senses that the driver has applied hard/fast
pressure to the brake pedal, the system will generate
additional pressure, making it easier for the driver
to maintain brake application. When this happens the
brake pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let the system work for you.
You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice
some noise but this is normal. The brakes will return to
normal operation after the brake pedal has been
released.
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Speed Variable Assist Steering
Your vehicle has a steering system that varies the
amount of effort required to steer the vehicle in relation
to the speed of the vehicle.
The amount of steering effort required is less at slower
speeds to make the vehicle more maneuverable
and easier to park. At faster speeds, the steering effort
increases to provide a sport-like feel to the steering.
This provides maximum control and stability.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has this feature, engine power is sent to
all four wheels when needed. During normal driving
conditions the vehicle will operate in 2WD mode. When
the system senses a loss of traction the vehicle will
automatically change to AWD mode.
If your vehicle seems harder to steer than normal when
parking or driving slowly, there may be a problem
with the system. You will still have power steering, but
steering will be stiffer than normal at slow speeds.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
If you have the spare tire on the vehicle, there may be a
reduction in performance of the AWD system.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
Competitive Driving
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
competitive driving.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitive
driving, the engine may use more oil than it would
with normal use. Low oil levels can damage the
engine. Be sure to check the oil level often during
competitive driving and keep the level at or near the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range
on the engine oil dipstick. For information on how to
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
Driving at Night
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
CAUTION: (Continued)
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
CAUTION: (Continued)
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
• Allow extra following distance.
up-to-date maps?
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
on page 5-59.
Other driving tips include:
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{CAUTION:
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and the
road, you can have a very slippery situation. You have a
lot less traction, or grip, and need to be very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Traction Control System (TCS) improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though you have TCS, slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. Under certain conditions,
you might want to turn the TCS off, such as when
driving through deep snow and loose gravel, to help
maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you
are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label, and the Certification label.
clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off
any traction or stability system. See Traction Control
page 4-8. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, or with a manual
transmission, between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2)
and REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
could free your vehicle. If that does not get your
vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed
out. If your vehicle does need to be towed out, see
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see Tires
page 5-67.
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Example Label
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Example 1
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification label also shows the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Never
exceed the GVWR or the GAWR for either
the front or rear axle.
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
either the driver’s door edge or the lower center
pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This label
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as
fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
{CAUTION:
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as
you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Dolly Towing
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
page 4-16.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly:
1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
2. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” following for
more information.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for an automatic
transmission or in NEUTRAL for a manual
transmission.
Towing a Trailer
4. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
{CAUTION:
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
If you have an All-Wheel-Drive vehicle, it can only be
towed on a flat-bed trailer.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this
section. Trailering is different than just driving your
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to
work harder against the drag of the added weight.
The engine is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.
Also, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer.
• The weight of the trailer tongue.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer/retailer about sway controls.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted form the maximum trailer weight.
You can ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write us at our
Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer Assistance
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers, or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you
tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the
GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight,
more information about your vehicle’s maximum load
capacity.
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
Safety Chains
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the
hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
water can also enter the vehicle.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you will
be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into
your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems will not work well, or at all.
Trailer Wiring Harness
All of the electrical circuits required for your trailer
lighting system can be accessed at the driver’s side rear
lamp connector. This connector is located under the
carpet on the rear corner of the trunk compartment.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You will need more passing distance up ahead when you
are towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle is a good
deal longer, you will need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving On Grades
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer/retailer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down to a lower gear and
reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When you plug a
trailer lighting system into your vehicle’s lighting
system, its bulb warning lights may not let you know if
one of your lamps goes out. So, when you have a trailer
lighting system plugged in, be sure to check your
vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure
they are all working. Once you disconnect the trailer
lamps, the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one
of your vehicle lamps is out.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake
system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and
the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
trailering, it’s a good idea to review this information
before you start your trip.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-30.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine
GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids,
and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code V),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind
noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer
towing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than
87, you might notice an audible knocking noise when
you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy
knocking, the engine needs service.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines
additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-40. If this occurs, return to your authorized
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would
not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The fuel cap is behind a hinged fuel door on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. The fuel door is opened
by pushing in on the rear edge until the door pops out.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
The Tighten Gas Cap message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will be displayed if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-54 for more information.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-40.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is
in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite the fuel vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located inside
the vehicle on the lower
left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is located
under the front edge of the grille near the center.
Push the release lever up and raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-39.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
on page 5-122.
J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (If Equipped) (Not
Shown). See “When to Check and What to Use”
on page 5-44.
on page 5-44.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir (Out of View).
L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
on page 5-33.
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Under Engine
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
There is an oil pressure
light in the instrument
cluster and an Oil Pressure
Low Stop Engine
message on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
If the light and/or message appear, check the engine oil
level right away. For more information, see “Oil
Pressure Low Stop Engine” under DIC Warnings and
page 3-43. You should check the engine oil level
regularly; this is an added reminder.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview on page 5-14
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil level is within the add cross-hatched area at
the tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all
the way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
proper operating range and into the upper
cross-hatched area on the dipstick, the engine
could be damaged.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for three things:
• GM4718M
Look for this on the oil container, and use only those
oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard
GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on the front of
the oil container.
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard
may be identified as synthetic. However, not all
synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. Look for and
use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for
your vehicle.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A Change Engine Oil Soon message will
page 3-54. Change the oil as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you
are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all
you need for good performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change the oil prior
to a Change Engine Oil Soon message being turned on,
reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine
Oil Life System:
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC
for more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
If the Change Engine Oil Soon message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the Engine Oil Life
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near
page 5-14 for more information on location.
1. Turn the ignition off.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
2. Remove side cover by pulling up on front of cover.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Disconnect electrical connector from air box.
6. Remove the three air cleaner housing cover
screws.
4. Loosen the screw on the clamp holding the air outlet
duct in place. Do not pry the clamp off. position the
duct aside.
5. Remove the rubber hose from the air cleaner
housing mounting arm. Position the rubber hose
aside.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Pivot the air cleaner housing cover and remove the
cover from the air cleaner housing.
8. Remove the air cleaner element from the air
cleaner housing.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reinstall Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
{CAUTION:
1. Install the air cleaner element to the air cleaner
housing. Ensure that the air cleaner element
perimeter seal is installed correctly to the air cleaner
housing.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
2. Align the air cleaner housing cover tabs to the air
cleaner housing.
3. Install the air cleaner housing cover.
4. Install the air cleaner housing cover screws.
5. Install the surge tank hose to the air cleaner housing
mounting arm. Ensure that the hose is routed
correctly.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
6. Install the air cleaner outlet duct to the air cleaner
housing.
7. Tighten the air cleaner outlet duct screw clamp.
8. Attach electrical connector to airbox.
9. Reinstall side cover.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
When to Check Manual
Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer/retailer service department and have it repaired
as soon as possible.
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission
fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer service department and have it repaired
as soon as possible.
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is
difficult, you should have this done at the dealer/retailer
service department. Contact your dealer/retailer for
additional information or the procedure can be found in
the service manual. To purchase a service manual,
page 7-15.
How to Check Manual
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be difficult, you may choose
to have this done at your dealer/retailer service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission
is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
Hydraulic Clutch
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding
fluid will not correct a leak.
To check the fluid level, do the following:
1. Remove the filler plug.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
When to Check and What to Use
3. If the fluid level is good, replace the gasket and
reinstall the filler plug.
The hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
on page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
With either vehicle, be sure the plug is fully seated.
If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described
in the next steps.
How to Add Manual Transmission Fluid
Here is how to add fluid. See Recommended Fluids
fluid to use.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid to use.
3. Replace the gasket and reinstall the filler plug.
Be sure the plug is fully seated.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
How to Check and Add Fluid
Make sure the fluid level is at the MIN (Minimum) line
on the side of the reservoir. If it is not, remove the
cap and add the proper fluid until the level reaches the
MIN line.
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Engine Coolant
• Allow the warning lights and gages to work as
they should.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If the engine overheats, see
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than once or twice a
year, have your dealer/retailer check your cooling
system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FROID/FULL COLD line on the side of the surge tank.
Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the
side to the horizontal mark.
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward the rear of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
There are two engine hot messages that may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
more information.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait
until there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An Engine Overheated Idle Engine warning, along with
low coolant, can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an Engine Overheated Idle Engine warning,
but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when you:
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the Engine Overheated Idle Engine warning
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an emergency. Should a hot engine
condition exist, an overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine
damage. In this mode, there is a loss in power and
engine performance. Driving extended miles (km) and/or
towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should
be avoided.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting
and fan speed and open the windows, as
necessary.
If you no longer have the Engine Overheated Idle
Engine warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive
slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning does
not come back on, you can drive normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View)
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine is warm or hot, the coolant level should be
at or above the FROID/FULL COLD line on the side
of the coolant surge tank. If the engine is cold, the
coolant level should be near the FROID/FULL COLD
line on the side of the coolant surge tank. If it is not,
you could have a leak at the pressure cap or in
the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,
or somewhere else in the cooling system.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine hot light is on, both fans should be running.
If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-32 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
{CAUTION:
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the FROID/FULL
COLD line on the side of the coolant surge tank, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one-quarter turn and
then stop.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. The upper radiator
hose is the top hose coming out of the radiator, on
the passenger’s side of the vehicle. Watch out
for the engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FROID/FULL COLD
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Recheck the coolant level in the bottle next time you
use your vehicle to insure the system is full when cold.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to slightly above the FROID/FULL COLD line on the
side of the coolant surge tank.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
the location of the power
steering fluid reservoir.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
The Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid message will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the
fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-54 for more information.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the
{CAUTION:
reservoir.
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, you
should have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since
a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will
not work well.
If the ignition is in ON/RUN and the brake fluid is low, the
Service Brake System message will be displayed in the
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, DOT-3 brake fluid is
recommended for use. DOT-4 brake fluid is also
compatible with your vehicle’s brake system parts.
However, if you choose to use DOT-4 fluid, it is
recommended that you flush the brake hydraulic
system and refill it with new DOT-4 fluid at a regular
maintenance service every two years. See Additional
fluid from a sealed container only. See Recommended
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
After a power loss, such as disconnecting the battery or
removing the maxi fuses in the power distribution
fuse block, the following steps must be performed to
calibrate the electronic throttle control. If this is not done,
the engine will not run properly.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. Do not start the
engine.
2. Leave the ignition in ON/RUN for at least three
minutes so that the electronic throttle control will
cycle and re-learn its home position.
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Battery
4. Start and run the engine for at least 30 seconds.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. It is located
in the trunk, behind the trim panel, on the passenger side
of the vehicle. When it is time for a new battery, see your
dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement number
shown on the original battery’s label.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt
page 5-44 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations or the remote
positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals of the
other vehicle. Then locate the remote positive (+)
location on your vehicle. See Engine Compartment
locations the terminals.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the
Engine Control Module (ECM), ECM mounting
bracket, or any cables that attach to the ECM
bracket, you may damage the ECM. Always attach
the negative cable to your vehicle’s remote negative
ground location, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,
or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground
location, as shown in the illustration. It is located on
the rear passenger side of the vehicle. See
should always use this remote ground location,
instead of the terminal on the battery.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has
one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) ground
location is for this purpose.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel-drive, this is an
additional system that needs lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
A. Drain Plug
B. Fill Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be
necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should:
To adjust the vertical aim:
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
for more information.
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
• Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
• Have all tires properly inflated.
• Have the spare tire is in its original location in
the vehicle.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
Base Level
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the width of the
vehicle at the wall where it was marked it Step 4.
Uplevel
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low-beam headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
Passenger’s Side Shown
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm hex
socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Halogen Bulbs
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
{CAUTION:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
service them.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s
HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice
that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
To replace fog lamp bulb:
1. Pull out the push-pins located on the underside of
the protection shield to remove the shield.
1. Push tabs to remove the license plate lamp.
2. Turn the license plate lamp assembly down to
remove it.
2. Reach up behind the front bumper area from under
the vehicle to access the lamp housing.
3. Turn the socket counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it.
3. Remove the bulb socket from the housing by
turning the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
5. Push the new bulb straight into the socket.
4. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by
lifting the two plastic clips.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping the
bulb straight as you pull it out.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Bulbs
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
page 6-8.
Exterior Lamp
Front Turn Signal
Bulb Number
3157K
Fog Lamp (Uplevel Only)
License Plate Lamp
H11LL
It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see
W5WLL
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
To replace the wiper blade assembly:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them
off again when the wipers are in the out-wipe
position. The driver side blade will be straight up
and down on the windshield.
3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the
windshield.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Lift up the wiper blade assembly cap.
5. Pull the wiper blade assembly down far enough to
release it from the J-hooked end of the wiper arm.
Slide the assembly away from the arm.
7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding it over
the wiper arm to engage the J-hooked end. Pull up
on the assembly to lock it into place.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage
the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
6. Replace the blade with a new one.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
{CAUTION:
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
• Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
for inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Profile Tires
Winter Tires
If your vehicle has 235/50ZR18 or P235/50R18
size tires, they are classified as low-profile tires.
These tires are designed for very responsive
driving on wet or dry pavement. You may also
notice more road noise with low-profile performance
tires and that they tend to wear faster.
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb. Your
vehicle warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range,
and speed rating as the original equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support
that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
on page 5-83.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 5-67.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter
P as the first character in the tire size means
a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as
high as it is wide.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-67.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a
tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
page 4-22.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-22.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 5-76.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the
tread and the bead.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label lists your
vehicle’s original equipment tires and shows the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure
to operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the tire and loading information label, see Loading
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. The compact spare should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even when
they are underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has 235/50ZR18 size tires, they will
require inflation pressure adjustment when driving your
vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher
. Set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 44 psi (300 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following. When
you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to the
cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)
or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can
be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high-speed driving at 44 psi (300 kPa).
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
for additional information.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), the driver
can also check tire pressure levels using the DIC.
For additional information and details about the DIC
operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays
page 3-54.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210
of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
The Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the
tires when they are cold. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-22, for an example of the Tire and Loading
Information label and its location on your vehicle.
instrument panel cluster.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
A DIC warning message to check the pressure in a
specific tire is also shown on the DIC display screen.
The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning
message come at each ignition cycle until the tires
are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Your vehicle, when new, may have included a
factory-installed Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit. This
kit uses a GM approved liquid tire sealant. See Tire
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and
DIC message to come on are:
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The DIC message should go off once you
re-install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side
rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was not done
or not completed successfully after rotating the
vehicle’s tires. The DIC message should go off after
successfully completing the sensor matching
process. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
can take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms
that the TPMS sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire position.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions,
the matching process stops and you need to start over.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp, for the
driver side rear tire, the horn sounds two more
times to signal the tire learning mode is no longer
active. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
lock and unlock buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode
and Tire Learning Active message displays on the
DIC screen.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the tire and
loading information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
If your vehicle has 235/50ZR18 size tires, GM
recommends rotating these tires at 3,000 mile
(4 800 km) intervals. These tires are optimized for
dry traction and handling performance. Tread life
may be 15,000 miles (24 140 km) or less for these
tires, depending on how and where you drive.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not
include it in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
on page 4-22.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
vehicle’s tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
for more information.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
{CAUTION:
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt
from places where the wheel attaches to
the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use
a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
for additional information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they
are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect
how fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you
are unsure about the need to replace your tires as they
get older, consult the tire manufacturer for more
information.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
for information on proper tire rotation.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
It is all right to drive with your compact
spare temporarily, as it was developed for
use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your vehicle’s
original equipment tires may not be available for H, V,
W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires
with a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s
maximum speed capability.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading
about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its
location on your vehicle.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See
more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever
have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect
and what to do:
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension,
or other vehicle parts. The area damaged
by the tire chains could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash. Use another type
of traction device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on your vehicle and
tire size combination and road conditions.
Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, re-adjust or remove the device if it
is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin
your wheels. If you do find traction devices
that will fit, install them on the rear tires.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a compact spare
information shows you how to use your vehicle’s tire
changing equipment and how to change a flat tire safely.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
2. Park your vehicle. If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in PARK (P). See Shifting Into
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, move
the shift lever to REVERSE (R) and set the parking
brake firmly. See Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
information.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than a
1
⁄
4
inch (6 mm), the tire is too severely damaged for
the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
1
If the tire has a puncture less than a ⁄4 inch (6 mm)
If your vehicle has a factory installed tire sealant and
compressor kit, there is no spare tire, no tire changing
equipment and no place to store a tire.
in the tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant and
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
(With Sealant Selector Switch)
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit
that is capable of temporarily sealing a puncture up to
1
⁄
4
inch (6mm) in the tread area of the tire. There is
no jack or spare tire. The kit inflates the tire with liquid
sealant and air. The tire sealant and compressor kit
can also be used to inflate an underinflated tire. After the
tire is inflated to the recommended inflation pressure,
information, the vehicle must be driven for five miles to
distribute the sealant in the tire and seal the puncture.
After driving five miles the tire pressure must be
rechecked and adjusted as needed. See “Using the
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal
a Punctured Tire” later in this section. Be sure to
read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions. The kit includes:
A. Selector Switch
B. On/Off Button
C. Air Pressure Gage
D. Tire Sealant
Canister
E. Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
F. Sealant/Air Hose
(Clear)
G. Air Only Hose
After temporarily sealing the tire sealant and compressor
kit, it is recommended to take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer/retailer as soon as possible. If the
sealant is removed within 100 miles (161 kilometers)
of driving, then it is easier to clean from the tire and you
are less likely to require a replacement tire.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit by
turning the wing nut (C counterclockwise).
Accessing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
4. Remove the sealant and compressor kit from its
foam container (B).
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
sealant canister.
The sealant can temporarily seal small punctures in the
tread area of the tire. The sealant cannot seal sidewall
damage, large punctures, or a tire that has unseated
you need assistance.
The sealant can only be used to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant filling hose
assembly must be replaced at a dealer/retailer.
See “Removal and Installation of Sealant Canister”
later in this section.
A. Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
B. Foam Container
C. Wing Nut
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant might not be effective beyond the
expiration date. If needed, see your dealer/retailer
for a replacement canister.
To access the tire sealant and compressor kit:
more information.
2. Locate the tire sealant and compressor kit (A)
in the center of the cargo area.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Place the sealant and compressor kit on the ground
and unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) hose from the
compressor.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal a Punctured Tire
Follow these directions closely for correct sealant usage.
The sealant/air hose (F) is the top, clear hose.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant filling hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Unwrap and plug the air compressor accessory
plug (E) into an accessory power outlet in the
page 3-21 for more information.
Do not slam the door or close the window on the
compressor accessory plug cord.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
2. Inspect the damaged tire.
The sealant cannot seal sidewall damage, large
punctures, or a tire that has unseated from
page 2-34 for more information. The vehicle must
be running while using the air compressor.
Do not remove any objects that have penetrated
the tire.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure, found on the Tire and Loading Information
{CAUTION:
The pressure gage reads high while the compressor
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an
accurate pressure reading.
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle should not be
driven farther. Damage to the tire is severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Remove the
air compressor plug from the accessory power
outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire
8. Turn the selector switch (A) counterclockwise to
the sealant and air position.
9. Push the On/Off button (B).
11. Turn the compressor off by pushing the On/Off
button (B).
The sealant and compressor kit will inject sealant and
air into the tire. Sealant may leak from the puncture
until the vehicle is driven and the hole has sealed.
12. The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air
until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire.
The pressure gage (C) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop
and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air.
Steps 11 through 18 must be done right after
Step 10.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug (F) from
the accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield or
to the face of the radio/clock.
14. Disconnect the sealant/air hose from the tire valve
stem or tire pressure monitoring sensor cap, by
turning it counterclockwise, and replace the
tire valve stem cap.
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired.
Be careful when handling the tire inflator
components as they may be hot after usage.
{CAUTION:
15. Wrap the sealant/air hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
Storing the tire sealant and compressor
kit or other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.
16. Wrap the air compressor accessory plug (E)
back into place.
17. If the flat tire was able
to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister.
18. Return the equipment to the proper storage location
in the trunk of your vehicle.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant evenly in the tire. Stop at a
safe location and check the tire pressure, refer
to Steps 1 through 8 under “Using the Air
Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant to Inflate an Underinflated Tire
(Not Punctured)
Compressor without Sealant” next in this section.
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
20. If the tire pressure has fallen more then 10 psi
(68 kPa), below the recommended inflation pressure,
stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit
page 7-6 for more information.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, you can inflate the tire back up to
the recommended inflation pressure.
21. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and
vehicle with a rag.
22. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local dealer/
retailer or in accordance with your local state codes
and practices.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with a
new canister from your dealer/retailer.
Your tire sealant and compressor kit has an accessory
adapter located in a compartment on the bottom of
its housing that may be used to inflate air mattresses,
balls, etc.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire with the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer to have the tire inspected and
repaired.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
page 2-34 for more information. The vehicle must
be running while using the air compressor.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) from the bottom of
the air compressor.
3. Attach the air only hose (G) onto the valve stem
to secure into place.
4. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (E) into
an accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See
information.
6. Turn the selector switch (A) clockwise to the
air only position.
7. Push the On/Off button (B).
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Inflate the tire up to the recommended inflation
pressure using the air pressure gage (C) on the
top of the unit.
11. Disconnect the air only hose (G) and wrap the hose
in the bottom of the sealant and compressor kit.
12. Place the equipment in the original location in the
trunk of your vehicle.
The pressure gage read high while the compressor
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an
accurate reading.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
9. Turn off the air compressor by pushing the On/Off
button (B).
To remove the sealant canister:
10. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug (E) and
wrap it back into place.
1. Unwrap the sealant and air hose.
2. Push the canister release button.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
{CAUTION:
4. Replace with a new canister. See your
dealer/retailer for the new canister.
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger
5. Push the new canister into place.
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Without Sealant Selector Switch)
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit
that is capable of temporarily sealing a small puncture
1
up to ⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread. There is no jack
or spare tire. The kit inflates the tire with liquid sealant
and air. The tire sealant and compressor kit can
also be used to inflate an underinflated tire. After the
tire is inflated to the recommended inflation pressure,
information, the vehicle must be driven for five miles to
distribute the sealant in the tire and seal the puncture.
After driving five miles the tire pressure must be
rechecked and adjusted as needed. See “Using the
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit” later in this section.
Be sure to read and follow all of the tire sealant and
compressor kit instructions. The kit includes:
A. Air Compressor
B. Tire Sealant Canister
C. Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
D. On/Off Switch
E. Air Pressure Gage
F. Air Only Hose
G. Sealant/Air Hose
After temporarily sealing and inflating the with the tire
sealant and compressor kit, it is recommended to take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer/retailer as soon as
possible for tire repair or replacement. If the sealant is
removed within 100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving,
then it is easier to clean from the tire and you are less
likely to require a replacement tire.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the tire sealant
and compressor kit
strap by squeezing the
two tabs of the quick
release buckle.
Accessing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
To access the tire sealant and compressor kit:
more information.
4. Remove the sealant and compressor kit from its
foam container.
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
sealant canister.
The sealant can temporarily seal a puncture up to
1
⁄
4
inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. The sealant
cannot seal sidewall damage, large punctures, or a
tire that has unseated from the wheel. See Roadside
2. Locate the tire sealant and compressor kit on the
driver side of the vehicle, near the back corner of
the trunk.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The sealant can only be used to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced at a dealer/retailer.
See “Removal and Installation of Sealant Canister”
later in this section.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister, if it has expired, see your dealer/retailer for
a replacement.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal a Punctured Tire
Follow these directions closely for correct sealant usage.
2. Inspect the damaged tire. The sealant cannot seal
sidewall damage, large punctures, or a tire that has
unseated from the wheel. See Roadside Service
on page 7-6.
4. Place the sealant and compressor kit on the ground
and unwrap the sealant/air hose (G) from the
compressor.
3. If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated the tire,
do not remove it.
5. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Attach the sealant filling hose (G) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
{CAUTION:
Make sure the sealant and compressor kit on/off
switch (D) is in the O (off) position.
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
7. Remove the air compressor accessory plug (C)
from the unit.
8. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C) into
an accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See
information.
Do not slam the door or close the window on the
air compressor accessory plug.
10. Push the On/Off switch to the I (on) position.
The sealant and compressor kit will inject sealant
and air into the tire. Sealant may leak from the
puncture until the vehicle is driven and the hole has
sealed.
{CAUTION:
The pressure gage will initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the sealant into the
tire. Once the sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop and start
to rise again as the tire inflates with air.
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
page 2-34 for more information. The vehicle must
be running while using the air compressor.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure, found on the Tire and Loading Information
label using the air pressure gage on the top of
14. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug (C) from
the accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
15. Disconnect the sealant/air hose from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
The pressure gage reads high while the compressor
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an
accurate pressure reading.
Be careful when handling the tire inflator
components as they may be hot after usage.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle should not be
driven farther. Damage to the tire is severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Remove the
air compressor plug from the accessory power
outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire
16. Wrap the sealant/air hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
17. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back in the
air compressor. To do this, wrap the air compressor
accessory plug, snap in the plug, and then push
in the bottom and then the top of the wrapped
air compressor accessory plug.
12. Push the on/off switch (D) to the O (off) position.
13. The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak
air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire.
Steps 13 through 20 must be done right after
Step 11.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18. If the flat tire was able
to inflate to the
{CAUTION:
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister.
Storing the tire sealant and compressor
kit or other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.
Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield or
to the face of the radio/clock.
19. Return the equipment to its original storage
location in the trunk of your vehicle.
20. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant evenly in the tire. Stop at
a safe location and check the tire pressure, refer to
Steps 1 through 8 under “Using the Air Compressor
without Sealant to Inflate an Underinflated Tire
(Not Punctured)” next in this section.
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21. If the tire pressure has fallen more then 10 psi
(68 kPa), below the recommended inflation
pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot seal the tire. See Roadside
Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant to Inflate an Underinflated Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, you can inflate the tire back up to
the recommended inflation pressure.
2. Inspect the damaged tire. The sealant cannot seal
sidewall damage, large punctures, or a tire that has
unseated from the wheel. See Roadside Service
on page 7-6.
22. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and
vehicle.
23. Dispose of the sealant canister (B) and sealant/air
hose (G) at a local dealer/retailer or in accordance
with your local state codes and practices.
3. If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated the tire,
do not remove it.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with a
new canister from your dealer/retailer.
24. After temporarily sealing a tire with the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer to have the tire inspected and
repaired or replaced.
4. Unlock the air compressor hose from the sealant
canister by pulling up on the lever.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
page 2-34 for more information. The vehicle must
be running while using the air compressor.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
5. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
6. Push the air only hose (F) onto the tire valve stem
and push the lever down to secure in place.
7. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C) into
an accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See
information.
9. Push the sealant and compressor kit switch to
the I (on) position.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Inflate the tire up to the recommended inflation
pressure using the air pressure gage on the top
of the unit.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
The pressure gage read high while the compressor
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an
accurate reading.
11. Turn off the air compressor by pushing the switch
to the O (off) position.
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor
kit or other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.
1. Unlock the air compressor hose from the sealant
canister by pulling up on the lever.
2. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
12. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and wrap
the hose in the bottom of the sealant and
compressor kit.
3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose from the compressor.
13. Place the equipment in the original location of
your vehicle.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To install a new sealant canister:
1. Align the sealant/air hose with the slot in the
air compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant/air hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
4. Push the air only hose onto the sealant canister inlet
and push the lever down to secure.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling hose
is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor and
replace with a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
The following information tells you how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
To gain access to the spare tire and jacking equipment,
do the following:
1. Remove the spare tire cover.
2. Remove the stow rod cap by pulling it straight up
off of the rod.
3. Turn the wing nut (A) on the compact spare tire (B)
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. Remove the spare tire and place it next to the
flat tire.
5. The tools you will be using next include the jack (C),
wheel wrench (D), and extension (E).
A. Wing Nut
B. Spare Tire
C. Jack
D. Wheel Wrench
E. Extension
F. Strap
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
3. Find the jacking location using the diagram above
and corresponding V-shaped locating notches
located in the plastic molding.
2. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not remove them
yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn the handle
about 180 degrees, then return the handle back to
the starting position. This avoids taking the
wrench off the lug nut for each turn.
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
4. Insert the hooked end of the extension handle
through the jack and the flat end through the
wheel wrench.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could
break the molding and/or cause other damage to
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when
the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the
notch located inboard from the rocker molding.
6. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until the slots in the jack head fit into the metal
flange located behind the V–shaped locating notches
on the plastic molding as shown.
5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the jack lift head until the jack fits under the
vehicle.
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the
vehicle.
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove all the wheel
nuts and the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become
loose after time. The wheel could come off and
cause an accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
11. Install the spare tire.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel.
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise with
your hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten
the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to
the proper torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{CAUTION:
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel
nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get
new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
nut torque specification.
sequence as shown.
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the
compact spare tire in the trunk:
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
After you have put the compact spare tire on your
vehicle, you will need to store the flat tire in your trunk.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can.
A. Wing Nut
C. Jack
B. Compact Spare
Tire or Flat Tire
(valve stem down)
D. Wheel Wrench
E. Extension
F. Strap
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Compact Spare Tire
If your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire it
was fully inflated when the vehicle was new, it can
lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure
regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to your vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
your interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use
only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage your vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that
the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with just
water and mild soap.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
manufacturers’ directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not
use it on your vehicle or damage may occur
and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-115.
Finish Care
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or
damaged.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underbody Maintenance
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Description
Polishing Cloth
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls
and raised white lettering.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Chrome Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Swirl Remover Polish
5-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
Cleaner Wax
Usage
Vehicle Identification
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Wash Wax Concentrate
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN
also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Spot Lifter
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
5-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
engine code.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as they
should.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the spare tire cover. It is very helpful
if you ever need to order parts. The label has the
following information:
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
5-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment.
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is
fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Lift the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
5-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam Headlamp
RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp
AIRBAG IGN Airbag Switch
SPARE
BCM 7
Spare
Body Control Module 7
Not Used
Low-Beam Daytime Running
LO BEAM DRL
Lamp (DRL)
PED PROT
5-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
WPR
TRANS
OIL RLY
Usage
Windshield Wiper
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Transmission Control Module (TCM),
IPC (Instrument Panel Cluster),
PASS-Key® III+ Module
ECM/TCM IGN
Transmission Oil Relay
BCM 4
Body Control Module 4
MISC IGN
EMIS 1
DISPLY
BCM 3
Ignition
Emission 1
Display
RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp
AWD All-Wheel Drive
LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam Headlamp
Body Control Module 3
Transmission Control Module
TCM BATT
Battery
DRL RT
SPARE
ABS
EVEN COILS Even Coils
BCM 6
BCM 2
ODD COILS
BCM 1
Body Control Module 6
Body Control Module 2
Odd Coils
Right Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Spare
Antilock Brake System
Horn
Body Control Module 1
HORN
LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam Headlamp
WSW PUMP Windshield Washer Pump
A/C CLTCH
DRL/ENG
PUMP
PassKey Module, Body Control
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
PWR MODING
Module
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
STR/WHL/
Steering Wheel Illumination
ILLUM
HDM WASH Headlamp Driver Module Washer
EMIS 2
AFS
Emission 2
Adaptive Forward Lighting System
J-Case Fuses
FAN 2
Usage
RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam Headlamp
Cooling Fan 2
Spare
Cooling Fan 2
Spare
NAV MTR
FRT FOG
ECM
Navigation Motor
Front Fog Lamps
Engine Control Module
Body Control Module 5
SPARE
FAN 1
SPARE
BCM 5
5-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Relays
IGN 1
STRTR
PWR/TRN
Usage
STRTR
Starter
Ignition 1
Starter
Powertrain
TRANS PUMP Transmission Pump
WSW/HTR
Windshield Washer Heater
BRK VAC
PUMP
BLWR
ABS MTR
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
Brake Vacuum Pump
HI BEAM
High-Beam Headlamp
Blower
Daytime Running Lamps
Antilock Brake System Motor
DRL (W/O HID) (without High Intensity Discharge),
LO BEAM (HID) Low Beam Headlamps (High
Intensity Discharge)
SPARE
Spare
WPR
Windshield Wiper
WPR HI
HEAD LAMP
WASH
Windshield Wiper High Speed
Relays
FAN 2
FAN S/P
Usage
Headlamp Washer
Horn
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
HORN
LO BEAM
(W/O HID)
Low-Beam (without High Intensity
Discharge), Left Daytime Running
WSW PUMP Windshield Washer Pump
A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor
LT DRL (HID) Lamp (High Intensity Discharge)
ENG PUMP
Engine Pump
FAN 1
FOG LAMP
SPARE
Cooling Fan 1
Fog Lamps
Spare
Right Daytime Running Lamp
(High Intensity Discharge)
RT DRL (HID)
5-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
LF FRT/
PWR/SEAT
RT FRT/
PWR/SEAT
PWR/WNDW Power
PWR/CLMN
Usage
Fuses
DR/LCK
RDO
Usage
Door Lock
Audio System
Left Front Power Seat
TRUNK/RELSE Trunk Release
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump
AIRBAG
THEFT/UGDO
SPARE
RKE/
PASS-Key®/
MDL
MSM
STOP/LP
RDO/SPKR
PDM
Right Front Power Seat
Airbag System
Power Steering Column
Theft Deterrent System,
Universal Home Remote System
TRUNK/RELSE Trunk Release
LCK
Lock
Spare
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump
Remote Keyless Entry System,
PASS-Key® Theft Deterrent
Feature Module
Memory Seat Module
Stoplamp
UNLCK
STOP/LP
SPARE
RT/POS/LP
REAR/FOG
LT/POS/LP
Unlock
Stoplamp
Spare
Right Position Lamp
Not Used
Left Position Lamp
Audio Speakers
Passenger Door Module
Right Position Lamp
OnStar® System
RT/POS/LP
ONSTAR
REAR/WNDW Rear Window
Fuses
Usage
Left Position Lamp
Not Used
LT/POS/LP
REAR/FOG
SPARE
RT/POS/LP
RVC/SNSR
S/ROOF
ECM
Sunroof
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Spare
AUX/OUTLET Auxiliary Power Outlet
CNSTR/VENT Canister Vent
Right Position Lamp
Regulated Voltage Control Sensor
AMP
Amplifier
LT/REAR/
WNDW
Left Rear Window
5-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant
charge amount, see the refrigerant caution
label located under the hood. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
3.6L HFV6 Engine (LY7)
3.6L HFV6 Engine (LLT)
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L HFV6 Engine
10.3 qt
10.6 qt
9.7 L
10.0 L
6.0 qt
5.7 L
Fuel Tank
18.0 gal
68.1 L
Transmission (Pan Removal and Replacement)
6-Speed Automatic
6.7 qt
1.9 qt
6.3 L
1.8 L
6-Speed Manual
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
(140 Y)
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
Manual
3.6L HFV6
7
0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
Automatic
Manual
3.6L HFV6
V
0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
5-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
on page 5-5.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the required
know-how and the proper tools and equipment
for the job. If you have any doubt, see your
dealer/retailer to have a qualified technician do
page 5-4.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message appears,
the following services, checks, and inspections are
required:
Scheduled Maintenance
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of your
vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service
be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires for inflation pressures
✍ Visually check for any leaks or damage.
See footnote (k).
✍ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
See footnote (l).
✍ Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear.
page 6-8.
✍ Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
✍ Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid
levels and add fluid as needed.
✍ Perform any needed additional services.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate
that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset
the system.
See “Additional Required Services” in this section.
✍ Inspect suspension and steering components.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to
reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
information on the Engine Oil Life System and
resetting the system.
See footnote (b).
✍ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
✍ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
✍ Inspect restraint system components.
See footnote (e).
✍ Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Replace passenger compartment air
filter. See footnote (g).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
If using DOT-4 brake fluid, change
brake fluid at a regular maintenance
service every two years.
See footnote (j).
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
page 5-117 for more information.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-70.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
(j) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush, and
refill brake hydraulic system at a regular maintenance
service every two years. This service can be complex;
you should have your dealer/retailer perform this service.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all body
door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches, including
those for the hood, rear compartment, console door, and
any folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may
be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
Tire Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-75.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in
any other position, contact your dealer/retailer for
service.
on page 2-43.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal down halfway,
and try to start the engine. The vehicle should start
only when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the
way to the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch
pedal is not pushed all the way down, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
CAUTION: (Continued)
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
• With an automatic transmission, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
• With the key access ignition system, the ignition
key should come out only in LOCK/OFF. With
keyless access ignition, the ignition key does not
come out. See Ignition Positions (Key Access)
on page 2-33.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Check the sealant expiration date printed on the
instruction label of the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit (if equipped) at least once a year. See your
dealer/retailer for a replacement canister.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-27.
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only
GM Part No. U.S. 88958860, in
Hydraulic
Clutch System Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4
brake fluid.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard can be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. However, not all synthetic
API oils with the starburst symbol
will meet this GM standard. Look
for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M. For the
proper viscosity, see Engine Oil
on page 5-16.
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Parking Brake
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Cable Guides
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
Engine Oil
in Canada 89021186).
SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil
Manual
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862475,
Transmission
in Canada 88862476).
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Transfer Case Transfer Case Fluid
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
(All-Wheel
Drive)
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861950,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 88861951).
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and Release Category LB or GC-LB.
Pawl
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hinges
Floor Shift
Linkage
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
With a complete drain and
refill add 4 ounces (118 ml) of
Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, in
Canada 992694) where required.
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
ACDelco® Part
Part
GM Part Numbers
Numbers
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
15875795
25177917
19130403
12597464
—
PF2129
—
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
41-990
Wiper Blades (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.3 cm)
12487636
12487638
—
—
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In
Canada, contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre by calling 1-888-446-2000.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (United States Owners): Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after the following the procedure outlined in
Steps One and Two. General Motors of Canada Limited
wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The
program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days.
We believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively you may call the
General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or
you may write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the
following address. Your inquiry should be accompanied
by your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
My GM Canada (Canada only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY
users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be
addressed to:
www.gmcanada.com
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
United States — Customer Assistance
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
As the owner of a new Cadillac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Cadillac Roadside
Service® program.
Who Is Covered?
Roadside Service coverage is for the vehicle operator,
regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is not
eligible for coverage.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100. These services are
provided at a nominal charge if the vehicle is no longer
within the Powertrain warranty.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Powertrain Warranty — 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km).
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac
Roadside Service will send you detailed, computer
personalized maps, highlighting your choice of either
the most direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along with
helpful travel information pertaining to your trip.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, for safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels will
not be provided through this service.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. In Canada, trip routing requests will
be limited to six per calendar year.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your car
towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each
technician travels with a specially equipped service
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and
tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 60 months/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) warranty period. Items
covered are hotel, meals, and rental car.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times when Roadside Service cannot provide timely
assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Cadillac Roadside Service®.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Service
Representative:
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
Cadillac Technician Roadside
Service (U.S. only)
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner in the United States with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a
Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Service coverage
are towing or services for vehicles operated on a
non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State, Provincial
or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or changing of
snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Roadside Service is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Service program at any time without
notification.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Transportation Options
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please
see your dealer for the maximum number of days
allowed and the allowance per rental day. Rental
reimbursement must be supported by original receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Repair Facility
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians
and state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you can
get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Bulletins
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
manual for more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-18
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
T
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-41
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
